WO2020063687A1 - Video decoding method and video decoder - Google Patents

Video decoding method and video decoder Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020063687A1
WO2020063687A1 PCT/CN2019/107931 CN2019107931W WO2020063687A1 WO 2020063687 A1 WO2020063687 A1 WO 2020063687A1 CN 2019107931 W CN2019107931 W CN 2019107931W WO 2020063687 A1 WO2020063687 A1 WO 2020063687A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
current
node
mer
coding block
block
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/107931
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨海涛
徐巍炜
赵寅
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020063687A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020063687A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/136Incoming video signal characteristics or properties
    • H04N19/137Motion inside a coding unit, e.g. average field, frame or block difference
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/44Decoders specially adapted therefor, e.g. video decoders which are asymmetric with respect to the encoder
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • H04N19/513Processing of motion vectors
    • H04N19/517Processing of motion vectors by encoding
    • H04N19/52Processing of motion vectors by encoding by predictive encoding
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/593Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving spatial prediction techniques
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/90Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using coding techniques not provided for in groups H04N19/10-H04N19/85, e.g. fractals
    • H04N19/96Tree coding, e.g. quad-tree coding

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application generally relate to the field of video coding, and more specifically, to a video decoding method and a video decoder.
  • Video encoding (video encoding and decoding) is widely used in digital video applications, such as broadcast digital TV, video transmission on the Internet and mobile networks, real-time conversation applications such as video chat and video conferencing, DVD and Blu-ray discs, video content acquisition and editing systems And security applications for camcorders.
  • Video Coding AVC
  • ITU-T H.265 High Efficiency Video Coding
  • 3D three-dimensional
  • HEVC High Efficiency Video Coding
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a video decoding method and a video decoder, which can improve decoding efficiency.
  • the invention relates to a video decoding method, which may be performed by a video decoder.
  • the method is a decoding method based on a Motion Estimation Region (MER). It includes: obtaining partition information of a current coding block; determining a current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the partition information; determining a first coding block, where the first coding block is a spatial domain candidate corresponding to the current coding block A coding block; determining whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER;
  • MER Motion Estimation Region
  • the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, it is determined that A second coding block adjacent to the MER space, wherein the information of the MER includes the coordinates of the MER; and a candidate list of spatial motion information is constructed based on the second coding block, and the second coding block is located outside the current MER ; Predicting and reconstructing the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  • the video decoding method provided by the present invention can re-select a coding block outside the MER to build a spatial motion information candidate list in the case that a selected coding block corresponding to the spatial domain candidate and the current coding block belong to the same MER, thereby It is ensured that the coding block used to construct the candidate list of spatial motion information is appropriate, thereby improving the efficiency of encoding and decoding.
  • airspace candidates are spatial candidates.
  • Spatial candidates can be considered as a set of coordinates.
  • the spatial domain candidate includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block.
  • the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block.
  • the positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8.
  • the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 .
  • the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
  • (xN, yN) may be specifically the coordinates of the upper left corner of the first encoding block
  • (xP, yP) may be specifically the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current encoding block
  • (xMER, yMER) may be specifically the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current MER
  • the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block may be expressed as (xM, yM), and may specifically be the coordinates of the upper left corner of the second coding block.
  • the coordinates of the above several blocks should be the values in the same coordinate system.
  • This value can be an absolute value or a relative value relative to a point in the coordinate system, such as the origin of the coordinate system. Without restrictions. And, in the same implementation, the coordinates of the above several blocks should be taken from the same position of these blocks, for example, all the coordinates of the upper right corner of these blocks, or the coordinates of the lower right corner, or the coordinates of the center point, etc. Applications are not limited. Therefore, the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block can be expressed by a mathematical relationship between xN and xP, and yN and yP.
  • the information of the current MER further includes a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates a coordinate of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and determines a second encoding adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the current MER information
  • the block includes: if xN-xP is less than zero, determining a coordinate corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates a coordinate of the current MER, M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER; and in the case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, determining the coordinates corresponding to the second en
  • the information of the current MER further includes a width and a height of the current MER
  • (xN, yN) indicates a coordinate of the first encoding block
  • (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block
  • the current MER information A block including: in a case where xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, determining a coordinate corresponding to the second encoding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates For the coordinates of the current MER, M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER; and when yN-yP is less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second en
  • the information of the current MER further includes a width and a height of the MER
  • the first coding block is a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block.
  • the determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block and the current MER information includes: When a coding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current coding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER); between the first coding block and the current coding block When the left edges of the blocks are adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1); the upper right corner of the first encoding block and the current encoding block are in phase with each other.
  • the coordinate corresponding to the second encoding block is (xMER + wMER, yMER-1); in the case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper side of the current encoding block, the second The coordinates corresponding to the coding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1); between the first coding block and the current coding block When the upper left corner is adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1); where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, hMER indicates the height of the MER, wMER indicates the width of the MER.
  • (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first encoding block
  • (xP, yP) indicates coordinates of the current encoding block
  • Indicating the coordinates of the current MER, and determining a second encoding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the information of the current MER include:
  • the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yN);
  • the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xN, yMER-1);
  • the coordinate range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is greater than An integer equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
  • the available second coding block can be determined.
  • the acquiring the partition information of the current coding block includes: acquiring a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and the current coding block Multiple Type Tree (MTT) partition depth M, the current coding block is one of multiple coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is partitioned M + N times.
  • QT quad-tree
  • MTT Multiple Type Tree
  • determining the range of the sub-units divided by the four-difference tree as the MER can effectively ensure that the coding block in the MER does not exceed the MER, and the MER does not include the sub-units in other MERs. , Thereby effectively ensuring the diversity of candidate motion information available in the construction of the motion list.
  • the width and height of the K-level quadtree node are equal to (1 ⁇ K1).
  • the determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the partition information further includes: if the quad-tree partitioning If the depth N is less than or equal to the first threshold T1, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, then the current coding block is the current MER.
  • the acquiring the partition information of the current coding block includes: acquiring a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is The sum of the QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT partition depth Dm of the current block, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, where The sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is the root node of the node. If the node does not continue to divide, it is called a leaf node.
  • the current coding block is One of a plurality of leaf nodes after the encoding unit is divided N times; and determining the current MER to which the current encoding block belongs according to the division information includes: if the division depth N of the current encoding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtain the N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and use the area covered by the N-T1 layer parent node as the current MER, where the parent node contains the current MER Code block and the node where the split node depth of less than N, the node of the current encoding block is located immediately adjacent to the parent node of the parent node of the current level of the first encoded block.
  • This embodiment provides another calculation method for determining the MER, that is, using the current node as a starting point, and finding the position of the MER's node in a reverse recursive manner.
  • the acquiring the partition information of the current coding block includes: acquiring a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is The sum of the QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT partition depth Dm of the current block, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, where The sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, the coding tree unit itself is the root node of the node, the node that is no longer divided is a leaf node, and the current coding block is that the coding unit passes N One of a plurality of leaf nodes after the second division; determining the current MER to which the current encoding block belongs according to the division information includes: if the division depth N of the current encoding block is greater than a first threshold T1, An area covered by a node with a division depth
  • This implementation is a simplified implementation, that is, the complexity of the implementation can be evolved by directly determining the range of the MER through T1.
  • the constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on a spatial-domain neighboring coding block of the current coding block includes: determining the spatial-domain neighboring block Whether the current coding block is located in the same MER, if yes, the airspace neighboring block is set as unavailable; if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring block .
  • the present invention relates to a video decoding method.
  • the decoding method may have a video decoder to perform a decoding method based on a Motion Estimation Region MER, which includes: obtaining division information of a coding tree unit; The partition information is used to divide the coding tree unit to obtain multiple nodes. Among the multiple nodes, a node that is continuously divided is a parent node, and a node that is not further divided is a leaf node.
  • the first node may be the parent node or a leaf node; determining a first encoding block, wherein the first encoding A block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the first node or a leaf node obtained by further dividing the first node; determining the current coding block and the first Whether the coding block belongs to the same MER; and in a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the first MER A position relationship between a code block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, determine a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace, wherein the information of the MER includes coordinates of the MER; The second coding block constructs a spatial motion information candidate list, and the second coding block is located outside the current MER; and the current coding block is
  • airspace candidates are spatial candidates. It includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block.
  • the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block.
  • the positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8.
  • the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 .
  • the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
  • airspace candidates are spatial candidates.
  • Spatial candidates can be considered as a set of coordinates.
  • the spatial domain candidate includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block.
  • the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block.
  • the positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8.
  • the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 .
  • the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
  • the second aspect provides another MER-based decoding method.
  • the difference lies in that the MER determination mechanism is different.
  • the MER determination method may precede the processing process of the current decoding unit, that is, the information of the MER on the coding tree unit. It is determined and recorded during the division process, and when constructing the spatial motion information candidate list of the current coding unit, the stored MER information can be directly called.
  • the method includes:
  • the division depth includes an independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth) ),
  • the determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT depth is The first node equal to 0 uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node.
  • the division depth is a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth)
  • determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth is equal to the preset condition and is further divided into A first node of a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is one of the plurality of MTT leaf nodes.
  • the partition depth N Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree partition depth of the node, and Db is a multiple of the node Depth of type division. If the node is a MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the node. The Db of the root node is increased by 1. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the root node of the node.
  • Determining that the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the division method is The first node of the tri-tree partitioning method, The area covered by a node is used as the MER of the first node, or it is determined that the partition depth N is equal to the second threshold T2, and the first node is divided into a binary tree or a quad tree, and the first node is The covered area is taken as the MER of the first node, where T2 is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the determining a first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node includes further The method includes determining that the division depth N is less than or equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1 and is the first node of the leaf node, and uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node.
  • the partition depth N Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree partition depth of the node, Db
  • Dq is a quad-tree partition depth of the node
  • Db For the multi-type partition depth of the node, if the node is a MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is obtained by a binary tree partitioning method, the The Db of a node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1.
  • the Db of the node Add 1 to the Db of the root node of the node. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the node.
  • the Db of the root node is increased by 2; determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth N is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the division method is a tri-tree division method Or the first node of the quad tree partition method, using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, or determining that the partition depth N is equal to the third threshold T3, and the partition method is the first node of the binary tree partition method.
  • T3 is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the MER of a node further includes: determining that the division depth N is less than or equal to the third threshold T3 and is the first node of the leaf node, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node.
  • the constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on a spatial-domain neighboring coding block of the current coding block includes: determining the spatial-domain neighboring block Whether the current coding block is located in the same MER, if yes, the airspace neighboring block is set as unavailable; if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring block .
  • the present invention provides a decoding device including various modules corresponding to the method of the first aspect, and the various modules are provided with functions for implementing each step of the method.
  • the parsing module is configured to obtain a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multiple type tree (MTT) partition depth of the current coding block.
  • QT quad-tree
  • M multiple type tree
  • the MER determination module is further configured to: when the quadtree partition depth N is less than or equal to the first threshold T1, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, then The current coding block is the current MER.
  • the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of a current coding block, where the partition depth N is a sum of a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and a MTT partition depth Dm of the current block.
  • the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein the sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is The root node of the node, if the node is no longer divided, it is called a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times; the MER determines The module is configured to: when the division depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtain the N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and use the N-T1 layer parent node to cover The region is the current MER, wherein the parent node is a node containing the node where the current coding block is located and the division depth is less than N, and the parent node immediately adjacent to the node where the current coding block is located is the current coding block. Tier 1 parent Point.
  • the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of a current coding block, where the partition depth N is a sum of a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and a MTT partition depth Dm of the current block.
  • the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein the sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is The root node of the node, the node that is no longer divided is a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times;
  • the MER determination module is configured to: When the partition depth N of the current coding block is greater than the first threshold T1, the area covered by the node with the partition depth T1 in the coding tree unit is used as the current MER, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer .
  • the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to construct the airspace motion information candidate list based on the motion information of the second encoding block. Airspace motion information candidate list.
  • the present invention provides a decoding device including various modules corresponding to the method of the second aspect, and the various modules are provided with functions for implementing each step of the method.
  • the division depth includes independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), and the MER determination module is used for It is determined that the first node whose QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT depth is equal to 0, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
  • QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth independent quad-tree Division depth
  • MTT Depth Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth
  • the division depth is a sum of a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), and the MER determination module is configured to determine A first node whose division depth is equal to the preset condition and is further divided into a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, and an area covered by the first node is used as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is the multi-node One of the MTT leaf nodes.
  • QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth quad-tree Depth
  • MTT Depth multi-type division depth
  • the division depth N Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree division depth of the node, Db is a multi-type division depth of the node, and if the node is an MTT root Node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by the binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node Is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is an MTT
  • the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method
  • the MER determination module is further configured to determine a first node that is a leaf node that is less than or equal to a second threshold T2 minus 1 and uses the area covered by the first node as the first node.
  • the MER of a node is further configured to determine a first node that is a leaf node that is less than or equal to a second threshold T2 minus 1 and uses the area covered by the first node as the first node. The MER of a node.
  • the division depth N Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree division depth of the node, Db is a multi-type division depth of the node, and if the node is an MTT root Node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by the binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node Is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is an MTT
  • the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method
  • the MER determination module is configured to determine that the division depth N is less than or equal to a third threshold T3 and is the first node of the leaf node, and uses the area covered by the first node as the first node's MER.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to The motion information of the second coding block constructs the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  • the present invention relates to a device for decoding a video stream, including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores instructions that cause the processor to execute the method according to the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the present invention provides a computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon instructions that, when executed, cause one or more processors to encode video data.
  • the instructions cause the one or more processors to perform a method according to the first or second aspect or any possible embodiment of the first or second aspect.
  • the invention relates to a computer program comprising program code which, when run on a computer, performs a method according to the first or second aspect or any possible embodiment of the first or second aspect.
  • the present invention provides a decoding method based on a motion estimation assessment region (MER), which includes: obtaining division information of a current encoding block; and determining the current MER to which the current encoding block belongs according to the division information. ;
  • MER motion estimation assessment region
  • all coding blocks in the MER range use the same spatial motion information candidate list.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an example of a video encoding system for implementing an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example structure of a video encoder for implementing an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example structure of a video decoder for implementing an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and the decoder 30 of FIG. 3.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating another example of an encoding device or a decoding device
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a division manner of a binary tree, a triple tree, and a quad tree
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of QT-MTT division
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an adjacent block in the space domain and an adjacent block in the time domain
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of determining available candidates based on MER
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of MER division
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a first MER and a coding block in a QT-MTT partitioning mode
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a coding method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another encoding method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an encoding device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another encoding apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the disclosure in connection with the described method may be equally applicable to a corresponding device or system for performing the method, and vice versa.
  • the corresponding device may include one or more units such as functional units to perform the described one or more method steps (e.g., one unit performs one or more steps Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of the multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (e.g., a step performs one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, where each performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • a step performs one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, where each performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units
  • the features of the various exemplary embodiments and / or aspects described herein may be combined with each other, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
  • Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or a video sequence.
  • picture In the field of video coding, the terms “picture”, “frame” or “image” can be used as synonyms.
  • Video encoding used in this application means video encoding or video decoding.
  • Video encoding is performed on the source side and typically involves processing (e.g., by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture (thus storing and / or transmitting more efficiently).
  • Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture.
  • the video pictures (or collectively referred to as pictures, which will be explained below) referred to in the embodiments should be understood as “encoding” or “decoding” related to a video sequence.
  • the combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
  • the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming there is no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission).
  • further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, and the decoder side cannot completely reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is compared to the original video picture The quality is lower or worse.
  • Each picture of a video sequence is usually partitioned into a set of non-overlapping blocks, usually encoded at the block level.
  • the encoder side usually processes at the block (video block) level, that is, encodes the video.
  • the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction.
  • the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same predictions (such as intra prediction and inter prediction) and / or reconstruction for processing, that is, encoding subsequent blocks.
  • the term "block” may be part of a picture or frame.
  • VVC Multi-purpose Video Coding
  • VCEG Video Coding Experts Group
  • MPEG ISO / IEC Motion Picture Experts Group
  • HEVC High-Efficiency Video Coding
  • JCT-VC Joint Collaboration, Video Coding
  • Each CU can be further split into one, two or four PUs according to the PU split type. The same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU.
  • a CU may be partitioned into a transform unit (TU) according to other quad-tree structures similar to a coding tree for a CU.
  • TU transform unit
  • quad-tree and binary-tree (QTBT) split frames are used to split coded blocks.
  • the CU may be a square or rectangular shape.
  • a coding tree unit (CTU) is first divided by a quad tree structure.
  • the quad leaf nodes are further partitioned by a binary tree structure.
  • Binary leaf nodes are called coding units (CUs), and the segments are used for prediction and transformation processing without any other segmentation.
  • CUs coding units
  • the segments are used for prediction and transformation processing without any other segmentation.
  • CUs coding units
  • the segments are used for prediction and transformation processing without any other segmentation.
  • the CU, PU, and TU have the same block size in the QTBT coded block structure.
  • Embodiments of the encoder 20, the decoder 30, and the encoding and decoding systems 10, 40 are described below based on Figs. 1 to 4 (before the embodiments of the present invention are described in more detail based on Figs. 12 and 13).
  • FIG. 1 is a conceptual or schematic block diagram illustrating an exemplary encoding system 10.
  • a video encoding system 10 that can use the technology of the present application (the present disclosure).
  • the encoder 20 (e.g., video encoder 20) and decoder 30 (e.g., video decoder 30) of the video encoding system 10 represent that they can be used to perform motion estimation based evaluation regions (MotionEst) based on various examples described in this application.
  • MotionEst motion estimation based evaluation regions
  • the encoding system 10 includes a source device 12 for providing the encoded data 13, such as the encoded picture 13, to a destination device 14 that decodes the encoded data 13, for example.
  • the source device 12 includes an encoder 20, and in addition, optionally, may include a picture source 16, such as a pre-processing unit 18 of a picture pre-processing unit 18, and a communication interface or communication unit 22.
  • a picture source 16 such as a pre-processing unit 18 of a picture pre-processing unit 18, and a communication interface or communication unit 22.
  • the picture source 16 may include or may be any kind of picture capture device for, for example, capturing real-world pictures, and / or any kind of pictures or comments (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be a picture to be encoded Or a part of an image) generating device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animated pictures, or for obtaining and / or providing real world pictures, computer animated pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality (VR) ) Pictures) of any type of device, and / or any combination thereof (eg, augmented reality (AR) pictures).
  • a computer graphics processor for generating computer animated pictures, or for obtaining and / or providing real world pictures, computer animated pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality (VR) ) Pictures) of any type of device, and / or any combination thereof (eg, augmented reality (AR) pictures).
  • AR augmented reality
  • a (digital) picture is or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with luminance values.
  • the sampling points in the array may also be called pixels (short for picture element) or pixels.
  • the number of sampling points of the array or picture in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) defines the size and / or resolution of the picture.
  • three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented as or contain three sampling arrays.
  • pictures include corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays.
  • each pixel is usually represented in a luma / chroma format or color space, for example, YCbCr, including the luma component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two chroma indicated by Cb and Cr Weight.
  • Luma (abbreviated as luma) component Y represents luminance or gray level intensity (for example, both are the same in a grayscale picture), while two chroma (abbreviated as chroma) components Cb and Cr represent chroma or color information components .
  • a picture in the YCbCr format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (Cb and Cr).
  • Y luminance sampling values
  • Cb and Cr chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values
  • Pictures in RGB format can be converted or converted to YCbCr format, and vice versa. This process is also called color conversion or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture can include only an array of luminance samples.
  • the picture source 16 may be, for example, a camera for capturing pictures, such as a memory of a picture memory, including or storing a previously captured or generated picture, and / or any category (internal Or external) interface.
  • the camera may be, for example, an integrated camera that is local or integrated in the source device, and the memory may be local or, for example, an integrated memory that is integrated in the source device.
  • the interface may be, for example, an external interface for receiving pictures from an external video source.
  • the external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device.
  • the external picture generation device is, for example, an external computer graphics processor, a computer. Or server.
  • the interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface.
  • the interface for acquiring the picture data 17 may be the same interface as the communication interface 22 or a part of the communication interface 22.
  • a picture or picture data 17 (for example, video data 16) may also be referred to as an original picture or original picture data 17.
  • the pre-processing unit 18 is configured to receive (original) picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the picture data 17 to obtain pre-processed pictures 19 or pre-processed picture data 19.
  • the pre-processing performed by the pre-processing unit 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (for example, conversion from RGB to YCbCr), color correction, or denoising. It is understood that the pre-processing unit 18 may be an optional component.
  • An encoder 20 (eg, video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19 and provide the encoded picture data 21 (details will be further described below, for example, based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4). In one example, the encoder 20 may be used for ...
  • the communication interface 22 of the source device 12 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and transmit it to other devices, such as the destination device 14 or any other device, for storage or direct reconstruction, or for correspondingly storing the
  • the encoded data 13 and / or the encoded picture data 21 are processed before transmitting the encoded data 13 to other devices, such as the destination device 14 or any other device for decoding or storage.
  • the destination device 14 includes a decoder 30 (for example, a video decoder 30), and in addition, optionally, it may include a communication interface or communication unit 28, a post-processing unit 32, and a display device 34.
  • a decoder 30 for example, a video decoder 30
  • the communication interface 28 of the destination device 14 is used, for example, to receive the encoded picture data 21 or the encoded data 13 directly from the source device 12 or any other source.
  • Any other source is, for example, a storage device, and the storage device is, for example, encoded picture data storage. device.
  • the communication interface 22 and the communication interface 28 can be used for direct communication through a direct communication link between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or transmission or reception of encoded picture data 21 or encoded data 13 through any type of network
  • the link is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection, and any type of network is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or any type of private and public network, or any combination thereof.
  • the communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a packet, for transmission over a communication link or communication network.
  • the communication interface 28 forming a corresponding part of the communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the encoded data 13 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
  • Both the communication interface 22 and the communication interface 28 may be configured as unidirectional communication interfaces, as indicated by the arrows for the encoded picture data 13 from the source device 12 to the destination device 14 in FIG. 1, or configured as bidirectional communication interfaces, and It can be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, acknowledge, and exchange any other information related to a communication link and / or data transmission such as encoded picture data transmission.
  • the decoder 30 is configured to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (details will be further described below, for example, based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 5).
  • the post-processor 32 of the destination device 14 is used to post-process decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data), for example, decoded picture 131 to obtain post-processed picture data 33, for example, post-processed Picture 33.
  • the post-processing performed by the post-processing unit 32 may include, for example, color format conversion (e.g., conversion from YCbCr to RGB), color correction, retouching, or resampling, or any other processing, such as preparing the decoded picture data 31 to be processed by
  • the display device 34 displays it.
  • the display device 34 of the destination device 14 is used to receive the post-processed picture data 33 to display a picture to, for example, a user or a viewer.
  • the display device 34 may be or may include any kind of display for presenting a reconstructed picture, such as an integrated or external display or monitor.
  • the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), Digital light processor (DLP) or any other display of any kind.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices
  • the device embodiment may also include the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or corresponding And the functionality of the destination device 14 or equivalent.
  • the same hardware and / or software, or separate hardware and / or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
  • Both the encoder 20 e.g., video encoder 20
  • decoder 30 e.g., video decoder 30
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • the device may store the software's instructions in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the techniques of the present disclosure.
  • processors any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) can be considered as one or more processors.
  • Each of the video encoder 20 and the video decoder 30 may be included in one or more encoders or decoders, and any of the encoders or decoders may be integrated as a combined encoder / decoder in a corresponding device (Codec).
  • the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device or a video encoding device.
  • the destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device or a video decoding device.
  • the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be examples of a video encoding device or a video encoding apparatus.
  • Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary device, such as a notebook or laptop computer, mobile phone, smartphone, tablet or tablet computer, video camera, desktop Computer, set-top box, TV, display device, digital media player, video game console, video streaming device (such as content service server or content distribution server), broadcast receiver device, broadcast transmitter device, etc., and may not be used Or use any kind of operating system.
  • a notebook or laptop computer mobile phone, smartphone, tablet or tablet computer, video camera, desktop Computer, set-top box, TV, display device, digital media player, video game console, video streaming device (such as content service server or content distribution server), broadcast receiver device, broadcast transmitter device, etc., and may not be used Or use any kind of operating system.
  • source device 12 and destination device 14 may be equipped for wireless communication. Therefore, the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be wireless communication devices.
  • the video encoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1 is merely an example, and the techniques of the present application may be applicable to a video encoding setting (eg, video encoding or video decoding) that does not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices. .
  • data may be retrieved from local storage, streamed over a network, and the like.
  • the video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to a memory, and / or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data.
  • encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other, but only encode data to and / or retrieve data from memory and decode data.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements, and decode related video data accordingly.
  • video encoder 20 may entropy encode one or more syntax elements that define ... into an encoded video bitstream.
  • video decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode related video data accordingly.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic / conceptual block diagram of an example of a video encoder 20 for implementing the technology of the present (disclosed) application.
  • the video encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transformation processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transformation processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, and a loop filter.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262.
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown).
  • the video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder according to a hybrid video codec.
  • the residual calculation unit 204, the transformation processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy coding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while the The constructing unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form a backward signal path of the encoder, wherein the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to To the decoder's signal path (see decoder 30 in Figure 3).
  • the encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or a block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, a picture in a picture sequence forming a video or a video sequence.
  • the picture block 203 can also be called the current picture block or the picture block to be encoded
  • the picture 201 can be called the current picture or the picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, other pictures such as the same video sequence (Ie previously encoded and / or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture).
  • An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a segmentation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for segmenting the picture 201 into multiple blocks, such as the block 203, and generally into multiple non-overlapping blocks.
  • the segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size and corresponding raster to define the block size for all pictures in the video sequence, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or groups of pictures, and split each picture into Corresponding block.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 of the video encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the aforementioned segmentation techniques.
  • block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with brightness values (sampling values), although its size is smaller than picture 201.
  • the block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (e.g., a luminance array in the case of a black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (e.g., one luminance array and two chroma arrays in the case of a color picture) or a basis An array of any other number and / or category of color formats applied.
  • the number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the block 203 defines the size of the block 203.
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode a picture 201 block by block, for example, performing encoding and prediction on each block 203.
  • the residual calculation unit 204 is configured to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture block 203 and the prediction block 265 (the other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below). Sample values of block 265 to obtain residual block 205 in the sample domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 is configured to apply a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain.
  • a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST)
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • DST discrete sine transform
  • the transform coefficient 207 may also be referred to as a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in a transform domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply an integer approximation of DCT / DST, such as the transform specified for HEVC / H.265. Compared to an orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. To maintain the norm of the residual blocks processed by the forward and inverse transforms, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process.
  • the scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints, for example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for shift operations, the bit depth of the transform coefficients, the trade-off between accuracy, and implementation cost.
  • a specific scaling factor is specified on the decoder 30 side by, for example, the inverse transform processing unit 212 (and on the encoder 20 side by, for example, the inverse transform processing unit 212 as the corresponding inverse transform), and accordingly, the The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transformation through the transformation processing unit 206.
  • the quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficients 207, for example, by applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficients 209.
  • the quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209.
  • the quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients may be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m.
  • the degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP). For scalar quantization, for example, different scales can be applied to achieve finer or coarser quantization.
  • a smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization, while a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization.
  • An appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by a quantization parameter (QP).
  • the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps.
  • smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size)
  • larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size)
  • Quantization may include division by a quantization step size and corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed, for example, by inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplication by a quantization step size.
  • Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size.
  • the quantization step size can be calculated using a fixed-point approximation using an equation containing division based on the quantization parameter. Additional scaling factors may be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equation for the quantization step size and quantization parameter.
  • inverse transform and inverse quantization scales can be combined.
  • a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in, for example, a bitstream. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
  • the inverse quantization unit 210 is configured to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantized coefficients 211. For example, based on or using the same quantization step as the quantization unit 208, the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 is applied. Inverse quantization scheme.
  • the inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as the inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually different from the transform coefficient.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply an inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, an inverse discrete cosine transform (DCT) or an inverse discrete sine transform (DST), in the sample domain.
  • DCT inverse discrete cosine transform
  • DST inverse discrete sine transform
  • the inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform inverse quantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.
  • the reconstruction unit 214 (for example, the summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (that is, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain.
  • the sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 265.
  • a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values, for example, for intra prediction.
  • the encoder may be used to use any unfiltered reconstructed block and / or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any category of estimation and / or prediction, such as intra-frame prediction.
  • an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only for storing the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2). Out), and / or, for example, to make the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 form a buffer.
  • Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and / or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as the input or basis for the intra prediction 254.
  • the loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter” 220) is configured to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or other filters, such as a bilateral filter, Adaptive loop filters (adaptive loop filters, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filters, or cooperative filters.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the filtered block 221 may also be referred to as a filtered reconstructed block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoded block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoded block.
  • An embodiment of the encoder 20 may be used to output loop filter parameters (e.g., sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy coding unit 270 or any other
  • the entropy coding unit outputs after entropy coding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
  • the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for the video encoder 20 to encode video data.
  • DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access (DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), and resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)) or other types of memory devices.
  • DRAM dynamic random access
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • MRAM magnetoresistive RAM
  • RRAM resistive RAM
  • the DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the filtered block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previously reconstructed pictures, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide a complete previous Reconstruction is the decoded picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and / or part of the reconstructed current picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example for inter prediction.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
  • Prediction processing unit 260 also referred to as block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or obtain block 203 (current block 203 of current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as a reference to the same (current) picture from buffer 216 Samples and / or reference picture data 231 from one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, i.e., may be provided as inter-predicted blocks 245 or intra- Prediction block 265 of prediction block 255.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (such as an intra or inter prediction mode) and / or a corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • a prediction mode such as an intra or inter prediction mode
  • a corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (e.g., selected from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260) that provides the best match or minimum residual (minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimal signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO), that is, to select a prediction mode that provides the minimum code rate distortion optimization, or to select a prediction mode whose related code rate distortion meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
  • RDO rate distortion optimization
  • the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from a set of (predetermined) prediction modes.
  • the prediction mode set may include, for example, an intra prediction mode and / or an inter prediction mode.
  • the set of intra prediction modes may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or average) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, such as non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
  • the set of (possible) inter-prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (i.e., at least part of the decoded pictures previously stored in DBP 230) and other inter-prediction parameters, such as whether to use the entire reference picture or only the reference A part of the picture, such as a search window area surrounding the area of the current block, searches for the best matching reference block, and / or depends on, for example, whether pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and / or quarter-pixel interpolation is applied.
  • a skip mode and / or a direct mode can also be applied.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may be further configured to divide the block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, using a quad-tree (QT) partition, a binary-tree (BT) partition, or a triple fork by iteration. Tree-triple-ternary-tree (TT) segmentation, or any combination thereof, and for performing predictions, for example, for each of block partitions or sub-blocks, where mode selection includes the tree structure and selection of the partitioned block 203 A prediction mode applied to each of a block partition or a sub-block.
  • QT quad-tree
  • BT binary-tree
  • TT Tree-triple-ternary-tree
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC) unit (not shown in FIG. 2).
  • the motion estimation unit is configured to receive or obtain picture block 203 (current picture block 203 of current picture 201) and decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other / different previous
  • the reconstructed block of picture 231 is decoded for motion estimation.
  • the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence or form the picture sequence.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture (or reference picture index) to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2). ) And / or provide an offset (spatial offset) between the position (X, Y coordinates) of the reference block and the position of the current block as an inter prediction parameter.
  • This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
  • the motion compensation unit is used for obtaining, for example, receiving inter prediction parameters, and performing inter prediction based on or using the inter prediction parameters to obtain the inter prediction block 245.
  • Motion compensation performed by a motion compensation unit may include taking out or generating a prediction block based on a motion / block vector determined through motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation on sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks.
  • the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list.
  • Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by video decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is configured to obtain, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, that receive the same picture for intra estimation.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
  • Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra-prediction mode based on an optimization criterion, such as based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra-prediction mode that provides a prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or a minimum code rate distortion.
  • an optimization criterion such as based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra-prediction mode that provides a prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or a minimum code rate distortion.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is further configured to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra prediction mode for the block, the intra prediction unit 254 is further configured to provide the intra prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra prediction mode for the block. Information. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques described below.
  • the entropy coding unit 270 is configured to apply an entropy coding algorithm or scheme (for example, a variable length coding (VLC) scheme, a context adaptive VLC (context adaptive VLC, CAVLC) scheme, an arithmetic coding scheme, and a context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding (context, adaptive binary coding, CABAC), syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC), probability interval partitioning entropy (PIPE) coding, or other entropy Encoding method or technique) applied to one or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and / or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain
  • VLC variable length coding
  • CAVLC context adaptive VLC
  • CABAC syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding
  • PIPE probability interval partitioning entropy
  • the encoded picture data 21 is output in the form of, for example, an encoded bit stream 21.
  • the encoded bitstream may be transmitted to video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by video decoder 30.
  • the entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice that is being encoded.
  • video encoder 20 may be used to encode a video stream.
  • the non-transform-based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without a transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary video decoder 30 for implementing the techniques of the present application.
  • the video decoder 30 is configured to receive, for example, encoded picture data (eg, an encoded bit stream) 21 encoded by the encoder 20 to obtain a decoded picture 231.
  • video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of encoded video slices.
  • the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362.
  • video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is substantially inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is configured to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and / or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , (Filtered) any or all of the loop filter parameters and / or other syntax elements.
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is further configured to forward the inter prediction parameters, the intra prediction parameters, and / or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360.
  • Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and / or the video block level.
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110, the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally identical to the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214, and the buffer 316 may be functionally Like the buffer 216, the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220, and the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354.
  • the inter prediction unit 344 may be functionally similar to the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 354 may be functionally similar to the intra prediction unit 254.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and / or obtain a prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and to receive or obtain prediction-related parameters from, for example, an entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly) and / or Information about the selected prediction mode.
  • the intra-prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the intra-prediction mode based on the signal representation and the previously decoded block from the current frame or picture Data to generate a prediction block 365 for a picture block of the current video slice.
  • the inter-prediction unit 344 e.g., a motion compensation unit
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is used to base the motion vector and receive the
  • the other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for a video block of the current video slice.
  • a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list.
  • the video decoder 30 may construct a reference frame list using a default construction technique based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330: List 0 and List 1.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is configured to determine prediction information for a video block of a current video slice by analyzing a motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate a prediction block for a current video block that is being decoded. For example, the prediction processing unit 360 uses some of the received syntax elements to determine a prediction mode (e.g., intra or inter prediction) of a video block used to encode a video slice, an inter prediction slice type (e.g., B slice, P slice or GPB slice), construction information for one or more of the reference picture lists for the slice, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for the slice, each warp for the slice The inter-prediction status and other information of the inter-coded video block to decode the video block of the current video slice.
  • a prediction mode e.g., intra or inter prediction
  • an inter prediction slice type e.g., B slice, P slice or GPB slice
  • construction information for one or more of the reference picture lists for the slice motion vectors for each inter-coded video block
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be used for inverse quantization (ie, inverse quantization) of the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304.
  • the inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also to determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 is configured to apply an inverse transform (for example, an inverse DCT, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
  • an inverse transform for example, an inverse DCT, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process
  • Reconstruction unit 314 (e.g., summer 314) is used to add inverse transform block 313 (i.e., reconstructed residual block 313) to prediction block 365 to obtain reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, such as by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.
  • the loop filter unit 320 (during or after the encoding cycle) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or other filters such as a bilateral filter, Adaptive loop filters (adaptive loop filters, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filters, or cooperative filters.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
  • the decoder 30 is used, for example, to output a decoded picture 31 through an output 332 for presentation to or review by a user.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream.
  • the decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without the loop filter unit 320.
  • the non-transform-based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video encoding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and / or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3 according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the system 40 may implement a combination of various techniques of the present application.
  • the video encoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, a video encoder 20, a video decoder 30 (and / or a video encoder implemented by the logic circuit 47 of the processing unit 46), an antenna 42, One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44, and / or a display device 45.
  • the imaging device 41, antenna 42, processing unit 46, logic circuit 47, video encoder 20, video decoder 30, processor 43, memory 44, and / or display device 45 can communicate with each other.
  • video encoding system 40 is shown with video encoder 20 and video decoder 30, in different examples, video encoding system 40 may include only video encoder 20 or only video decoder 30.
  • the video encoding system 40 may include an antenna 42.
  • the antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bit stream of video data.
  • the video encoding system 40 may include a display device 45.
  • the display device 45 may be used to present video data.
  • the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by the processing unit 46.
  • the processing unit 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the video encoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, and the processor 43 may be implemented by general software, operating system, and the like.
  • the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (for example, Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM), etc.) or non-volatile memory Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.).
  • the memory 44 may be implemented by a cache memory.
  • the logic circuit 47 may access the memory 44 (eg, for implementing an image buffer).
  • the logic circuit 47 and / or the processing unit 46 may include a memory (eg, a cache, etc.) for implementing an image buffer or the like.
  • video encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by processing unit 46 or memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include a video encoder 20 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and / or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • Logic circuits can be used to perform various operations discussed herein.
  • Video decoder 30 may be implemented in a similar manner by logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and / or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • video decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by processing unit 2820 or memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include a video decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and / or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • the antenna 42 of the video encoding system 40 may be used to receive an encoded bit stream of video data.
  • the encoded bitstream may contain data, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. related to encoded video frames discussed herein, such as data related to coded segmentation (e.g., transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients) , (As discussed) optional indicators, and / or data defining code partitions).
  • the video encoding system 40 may also include a video decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream.
  • the display device 45 is used to present video frames.
  • FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1 according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the device 500 may implement the technology of the present application.
  • the device 500 may be in the form of a computing system including a plurality of computing devices, or in the form of a single computing device such as a mobile phone, tablet computer, laptop computer, notebook computer, desktop computer, and the like.
  • the processor 502 in the apparatus 500 may be a central processing unit.
  • the processor 502 may be any other type of device or multiple devices capable of manipulating or processing information, existing or to be developed in the future.
  • speed and efficiency advantages can be achieved using more than one processor.
  • the memory 504 in the device 500 may be a read-only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device can be used as the memory 504.
  • the memory 504 may include code and data 506 accessed by the processor 502 using the bus 512.
  • the memory 504 may further include an operating system 508 and an application program 510, which contains at least one program that permits the processor 502 to perform the methods described herein.
  • the application program 510 may include applications 1 to N, and applications 1 to N further include a video encoding application that performs the methods described herein.
  • the device 500 may also include additional memory in the form of a slave memory 514, which may be, for example, a memory card for use with a mobile computing device. Because a video communication session may contain a large amount of information, this information may be stored in whole or in part in the slave memory 514 and loaded into the memory 504 for processing as needed.
  • the apparatus 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 518.
  • the display 518 may be a touch-sensitive display combining a display and a touch-sensitive element operable to sense a touch input.
  • the display 518 may be coupled to the processor 502 through a bus 512.
  • other output devices may be provided that allow the user to program or otherwise use the device 500, or provide other output devices as an alternative to the display 518.
  • the display can be implemented in different ways, including through a liquid crystal display (LCD), a cathode-ray tube (CRT) display, a plasma display, or a light emitting diode diode (LED) displays, such as organic LED (OLED) displays.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • CTR cathode-ray tube
  • plasma display a plasma display
  • LED light emitting diode diode
  • OLED organic LED
  • the apparatus 500 may further include or be in communication with an image sensing device 520, such as a camera or any other image sensing device 520 that can or will be developed in the future to sense an image, such as An image of a user running the device 500.
  • the image sensing device 520 may be placed directly facing a user of the running apparatus 500.
  • the position and optical axis of the image sensing device 520 may be configured such that its field of view includes an area immediately adjacent to the display 518 and the display 518 is visible from the area.
  • the device 500 may also include or be in communication with a sound sensing device 522, such as a microphone or any other sound sensing device that can or will be developed in the future to sense the sound near the device 500.
  • the sound sensing device 522 may be placed directly facing the user of the operating device 500 and may be used to receive a sound, such as a voice or other sound, emitted by the user when the device 500 is running.
  • the processor 502 and the memory 504 of the apparatus 500 are shown in FIG. 5 as being integrated in a single unit, other configurations may be used.
  • the operation of the processor 502 may be distributed among multiple directly-coupled machines (each machine has one or more processors), or distributed in a local area or other network.
  • the memory 504 may be distributed among multiple machines, such as a network-based memory or a memory among multiple machines running the apparatus 500.
  • the bus 512 of the device 500 may be formed by multiple buses.
  • the slave memory 514 may be directly coupled to other components of the device 500 or may be accessed through a network, and may include a single integrated unit, such as one memory card, or multiple units, such as multiple memory cards. Therefore, the apparatus 500 can be implemented in various configurations.
  • Figure 6 describes the division of binary tree, tri-tree and quad-tree, where:
  • a quadtree is a tree-like structure, meaning that a node can be divided into four child nodes.
  • the H265 video coding standard uses a quadtree-based CTU division method: the CTU serves as the root node, and each node corresponds to a square area; a node can no longer be divided (in this case, its corresponding area is a CU), or this
  • the node is divided into four nodes at the next lower level, that is, the square area is divided into four square areas of the same size (the length and width are each half of the length and width of the area before division), and each area corresponds to a node. As shown in Figure 6 (a).
  • a binary tree is a tree-like structure, meaning that a node can be divided into two child nodes.
  • a node on a binary tree structure may not be divided, or this node may be divided into two nodes at a lower level.
  • a triple tree is a tree-like structure, meaning that a node can be divided into three child nodes.
  • the nodes on a tri-tree structure may not be divided, or this node may be divided into three lower-level nodes.
  • the H.265 video coding standard divides a frame of image into non-overlapping coding tree units (CTU).
  • the size of the CTU can be set to 64 ⁇ 64 (the size of the CTU can also be set to other values, such as the CTU in the JVET reference software JEM The size is increased to 128 ⁇ 128 or 256 ⁇ 256).
  • a 64 ⁇ 64 CTU contains a rectangular pixel lattice of 64 columns and 64 pixels in each column, and each pixel contains a luminance component and / or a chrominance component.
  • H.265 uses a quad-tree (QT) -based CTU division method.
  • the CTU is used as the root node of the quad tree, and the CTU is recursively divided into several leaves according to the quad tree division method.
  • a node corresponds to an image area. If the node is not divided, the node is called a leaf node, and its corresponding image area forms a CU. If the node continues to be divided, the image area corresponding to the node is divided into four regions of the same size (the (The length and width are each half of the divided area.) Each area corresponds to a node. You need to determine whether these nodes will be divided separately.
  • the quadtree level (qtDepth) of the root node is 0, and the quadtree level of the node is the quadtree level of the parent node of the node plus 1.
  • the size and shape of the nodes in the following refers to the size and shape of the image area corresponding to the nodes.
  • the quadtree level is 0
  • Each of these four 32 ⁇ 32 nodes can choose to continue to divide or not to divide according to its corresponding split_cu_flag; if a 32 ⁇ 32 node continues to divide, four 16 ⁇ 16 nodes (four The level of the fork tree is 2). And so on, until all nodes are no longer divided, such a CTU is divided into a group of CUs.
  • the minimum size (size) of the CU is identified in the sequence parameter set (SPS: Sequence Parameter Set). For example, 8 ⁇ 8 is the smallest CU.
  • SPS Sequence Parameter Set
  • this leaf node When a node is parsed as a leaf node, this leaf node is a CU, and further analyzes the coding information corresponding to the CU (including the prediction mode and transformation coefficients of the CU, such as the coding_unit () syntax structure in H.265). Then, the CU is subjected to decoding, prediction, inverse quantization, inverse transform, and loop filtering according to the encoded information to generate a reconstructed image corresponding to the CU.
  • the quad-tree structure enables the CTU to be divided into a group of CUs of a suitable size according to the local characteristics of the image, for example, smooth regions are divided into larger CUs, and texture-rich regions are divided into smaller CUs.
  • VTM Versatile video coding Test Model
  • BT binary tree
  • TT ternary tree
  • Binary tree partitioning divides a node into two sub-nodes. There are two specific binary tree partitioning methods:
  • Three-tree partitioning divides a node into three sub-nodes. There are two specific methods for three-tree partitioning:
  • the division method of QT cascade BT / TT is used in VTM, referred to as QT-MTT (Quad Tree Plus Multi-Type Tree) division method. More specifically, the CTU generates QT leaf nodes through QT division. The nodes in the QT can be further divided into four QT child nodes using quad-tree division, or a QT leaf node can be generated without using quad-section division. The QT leaf node serves as the root node of the MTT. Nodes in MTT can be divided into sub-nodes using one of the four division methods: horizontal dichotomy, vertical dichotomy, horizontal dichotomy, and vertical dichotomy, or they can no longer be divided into one MTT leaf node.
  • the leaf node of MTT is a coding unit CU.
  • Figure 7 shows an example of dividing a CTU into 16 CUs such as a to p using QT-MTT.
  • Each endpoint on the right of Figure 7 represents a node, 4 nodes connected to a node represent quadtree partition, 2 nodes connected to a node represent binary tree partition, and 3 nodes connected to a node represent tritree partition.
  • the solid line represents the QT division
  • the dashed line represents the first-level division of a Multi-Type Tree (MTT)
  • the dot-dash line represents the second-level division of the MTT.
  • a to p are 16 MTT leaf nodes, and each MTT leaf node is 1 CU.
  • a CTU obtains the CU division diagram shown in the left diagram of FIG. 7 according to the division manner in the right diagram of FIG. 7.
  • each CU has a QT level (Quad-tree depth, QT depth, also called QT depth) and an MTT level (Multi-Type Tree depth, MTT depth, also called MTT depth).
  • QT level indicates the QT level of the QT leaf node to which the CU belongs
  • MTT level indicates the MTT level of the MTT leaf node to which the CU belongs.
  • the root node of the coding tree has a QT level of 0 and an MTT level of 0. If a node on the coding tree is divided by QT, the QT level of the child node obtained by the division is the QT level of the node plus 1, and the MTT level is unchanged.
  • the MTT level of the child node obtained by the division is the MTT level of the node plus 1, and the QT level is unchanged.
  • the QT level of a, b, c, d, e, f, g, i, and j is 1, and the MTT level is 2;
  • the QT level of h is 1, and the MTT level is 1;
  • the QT level for l and m is 2 and the MTTT level is 1.
  • the image block at the leaf node position under the coding tree is used as the coding unit.
  • the coding process mainly includes intra prediction (Intertra Prediction), inter prediction (Inter Prediction), transformation (Transform), and quantization (Quantization). ), Entropy encoding, in-loop filtering (mainly de-blocking filtering), etc., can be implemented by the codec described in Figures 1 to 5 of this article . That is, intra-frame prediction or inter-frame prediction is performed after the image is divided into coding units, and transform and quantization are performed after the residual is obtained, and finally entropy coding is performed and a code stream is output.
  • the coding unit is an array of M ⁇ N size composed of pixels (M may be equal to N or not equal to N), and the pixel value of each pixel point position is known.
  • Intra prediction refers to using the pixel values of pixels in the reconstructed area in the current image to predict the pixel values of pixels in the current image block / coding unit.
  • Inter prediction is to find a matching reference block for the current image block / encoding unit in the current image in the reconstructed image, and use the pixel value of the pixel point in the reference block as the pixel of the pixel point in the current image block / encoding unit.
  • Value prediction information or prediction value in the following, information and values are no longer distinguished
  • this process is called motion estimation (ME), and the motion information of the current image block / coding unit is transmitted.
  • ME motion estimation
  • the motion information of the current image block / coding unit includes indication information of the prediction direction (usually forward prediction, backward prediction, or bidirectional prediction), and one or two motion vectors (Motion vector, MV), and indication information of the picture where the reference block is located (usually referred to as a reference frame index, Reference index).
  • Forward prediction refers to that the current image block / coding unit selects a reference image from the forward reference image set to obtain a reference block.
  • Backward prediction refers to that the current coding unit selects a reference image from a set of backward reference images to obtain a reference block.
  • Bidirectional prediction refers to selecting a reference image from the forward and backward reference image sets to obtain a reference block. When the bidirectional prediction method is used, there are two reference blocks in the current coding unit, and each reference block needs a motion vector and a reference frame index to indicate, and then the pixel points in the current block are determined according to the pixel values of the pixel points in the two reference blocks. The predicted value of the pixel value.
  • the motion estimation process needs to try multiple reference blocks in the reference image for the current image block / coding unit. Which one or several reference blocks are ultimately used for prediction is Rate-distortion optimization (RDO) or other methods. determine.
  • RDO Rate-distortion optimization
  • the pixel value of the pixel point in the current image block / coding unit is subtracted from the corresponding prediction information to obtain residual information, and then Discrete Cosine Transformation (DCT), etc.
  • DCT Discrete Cosine Transformation
  • the method transforms the residual information, and then uses quantized entropy coding to obtain the code stream.
  • the prediction signal is added with the reconstructed residual signal, further filtering operations are required to obtain a reconstructed signal and use it as a reference signal for subsequent encoding.
  • Decoding is equivalent to the reverse process of encoding.
  • the residual information is obtained by inverse quantization and inverse transformation using entropy decoding, and the decoded bitstream determines whether the current coding unit uses intra prediction or inter prediction. If it is intra prediction, the pixel information of pixels in the surrounding reconstructed area is used to construct prediction information according to the used intra prediction method. If it is inter prediction, you need to parse out the motion information, use the parsed motion information to determine the reference block in the reconstructed image, and use the pixel values of the pixels in the block as prediction information. This process is called motion compensation (Motion Compensation, MC). Reconstruction information can be obtained by using prediction information plus residual information through a filtering operation.
  • Motion Compensation Motion Compensation
  • AMVP Advanced Motion Vector Prediction
  • Merge mode Merge mode
  • AMVP mode For AMVP mode, first obtain spatial or temporal candidates from the motion information of the current image block / coding unit in the spatial or temporally adjacent coded units, construct a motion vector prediction candidate list, and then determine from the motion vector prediction candidate list
  • the optimal motion vector is used as the motion vector predictor (MVP) of the current image block / coding unit.
  • the encoding end passes the index value of the selected motion vector prediction value in the motion vector prediction candidate list and the reference frame index value to the decoding end. Further, a motion search is performed in the neighborhood centered on the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current image block / encoding unit, and the encoding end transmits the difference (Motion vector difference) between the MVP and the actual motion vector to the decoding end.
  • MVP motion vector predictor
  • For the Merge mode first obtain spatial and temporal candidates from the motion information of the current coding unit in the spatial or temporally adjacent coded units, construct a fusion motion information candidate list, and then determine from the fusion motion information candidate list at the rate-distortion cost.
  • the optimal motion information is used as the motion information of the current coding unit, and then the index value of the position of the optimal motion information in the fusion motion information candidate list (denoted as merge index, the same below) is transmitted to the decoding end.
  • the current coding unit spatial and time domain candidates from the motion information of the current coding unit spatial domain or temporally adjacent coded units are shown in Figure 8.
  • the spatial domain candidates come from the five spatially adjacent blocks (A0, A1, B0, B1 and B2), by sequentially checking A1, B1, B0, A0, and B2 in sequence, up to four candidates can be inserted in the merge list in the stated order.
  • some additional redundancy checks are performed before using all motion data of neighboring blocks as merge candidates. These redundancy checks can be divided into two categories for two different purposes: a. Avoiding candidates with redundant motion data in the list; b. Preventing the merging of two redundant syntaxes that can be represented in other ways Partition.
  • N is the number of spatial merge candidates
  • the complete redundancy check will be determined by Comparison of secondary exercise data.
  • ten motion data comparisons will be required to ensure that all candidates in the merge list have different motion data.
  • the inspection of redundant motion data has been reduced to a subset, thereby maintaining a significant reduction in comparison logic while maintaining coding efficiency.
  • no more than two comparisons are performed for each candidate, resulting in a total of five comparisons. Given the order of ⁇ A1, B1, B0, A0, B2 ⁇ , B0 checks only B1, A0 checks only A1, and B2 checks only A1 and B1.
  • partition redundancy check the bottom PU and top PU of the 2N ⁇ N partition are merged by selecting candidate B1. This will result in one CU having two PUs with the same motion data, which can be signaled equally as a 2N ⁇ 2N CU. Overall, this check applies to all second PUs with rectangular and asymmetric partitions 2N ⁇ N, 2N ⁇ nU, 2N ⁇ nD, N ⁇ 2N, nR ⁇ 2N, and nL ⁇ 2N. It should be noted that for the spatial merge candidate, only the redundancy check is performed, and the motion data is copied from the candidate block as it is. Therefore, no motion vector scaling is needed here.
  • the motion vector of the temporal merge candidate comes from the block at the lower right and center of the same position block (Co-located) in the reference frame. This block is the most suitable to provide a good temporal motion vector predictor (TMVP).
  • TMVP temporal motion vector predictor
  • the length of the merge candidate list is fixed. After spatial and temporal merging candidates have been added, it may happen that the list does not yet have a fixed length. To compensate for the coding efficiency loss that occurs with non-length adaptive list index signaling, additional candidates are generated. Depending on the type of slice, up to two candidates can be used to completely populate the list: a. Combined bi-directional prediction candidates; b. Zero motion vector candidates.
  • the bidirectional prediction slice by combining the motion data of the reference picture list 0 of one candidate with the motion data of the list 1 of another candidate, another candidate can be generated based on the existing candidate. This is done by copying ⁇ x 0 , ⁇ y 0 , ⁇ t 0 from one candidate such as the first candidate, and ⁇ x 1 , ⁇ y 1 , ⁇ t 1 from another candidate such as the second candidate.
  • Different combinations are predefined and given in Table 1.
  • zero motion vector candidates are calculated to make the list complete. All zero motion vector candidates have one zero displacement motion vector for one-way prediction slices and two zero displacement motion vectors for two-way prediction slices.
  • the reference index is set equal to zero and incremented by one for each additional candidate until the maximum number of reference indexes is reached. If this is the case, and there are other candidates missing, these candidates are created using a reference index equal to zero. For all other candidates, no redundancy check is performed, as the results show that omitting these checks does not cause a loss of coding efficiency.
  • merge_flag indicates that the block merge is used to obtain motion data.
  • merge_idx further determines the candidates in the merge list that provide all the motion data required by the MCP.
  • the number of candidates in the merge list is also signaled in the slice header. Since the default value is five, it is expressed as the difference from five (five_minus_max_num_merge_cand). In this way, five are signaled with a short codeword of 0, while only one candidate is signaled with a longer codeword of 4.
  • the impact on the merge candidate list construction process the entire process remains the same, but after the list contains the maximum number of merge candidates, the process terminates.
  • the maximum value of the merge index encoding is given by the number of space and time candidates available in the list.
  • the index can be efficiently encoded as a flag when only two candidates are available, for example.
  • the entire merge candidate list must be constructed to understand the actual number of candidates. Assuming neighboring blocks that are unavailable due to a transmission error, it will no longer be possible to parse the merge index.
  • the key application of the block merge concept in HEVC is the combination with the skip mode.
  • a skip mode was used to indicate blocks that speculate rather than explicitly signal motion data, and predict that the residual is zero, that is, no transform coefficients are sent.
  • the skip_flag is signaled at the beginning of each CU in the inter-picture prediction slice, which means the following: a. The CU contains only one PU (2N ⁇ 2N partition type); b. Use the merge mode to Get motion data (merge_flag is equal to 1); c. There is no residual data in the code stream.
  • a parallel merge estimation level indicating regions is introduced in HEVC, where a merge candidate list can be obtained independently by checking whether a candidate block is located in the merge estimation region (MER). Candidate blocks in the same MER are not included in the merge candidate list. Therefore, its motion data does not need to be available during list construction.
  • this level is, for example, 32, then all prediction units in a 32 ⁇ 32 region can build a merge candidate list in parallel, because all merge candidates in the same 32 ⁇ 32MER are not inserted into the list.
  • the merge candidate list for PU 2-6 cannot contain motion data from these PUs. Therefore, for example when looking at PU5, no merge candidates are available and therefore are not inserted into the merge candidate list. In this case, the merged list of PU5 consists of only temporal candidates (if available) and zero MV candidates.
  • the parallel merge estimation level is adaptive and is signaled as log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 in the picture parameter set.
  • the MER obtained by the above MER determination method contains multiple CUs smaller than MER, the MER must contain multiple complete CUs, that is, multiple CUs smaller than MER are completely contained in one MER No CU with a size smaller than MER is included in multiple MERs at the same time.
  • the MER obtained by the above MER determination method can also ensure that if a CU is the same size as the MER, the CU must be included in a MER.
  • the inspection process mainly includes:
  • the airspace candidate is not available. Otherwise, the availability judgment rules of the airspace candidate in the HEVC standard are used to further judge the availability of the airspace candidate.
  • MER0 includes a part of a, b, and c
  • MER1 includes a part of c, e, and f.
  • the spatial domain candidates in the same MER as the current image block are marked as unavailable. If the number of available spatial domain candidates is reduced, the coding performance will be reduced.
  • the present invention proposes a solution.
  • the MER construction method is modified so that when one MER contains multiple CUs This MER must contain multiple complete CUs.
  • multiple CUs can perform motion estimation or decoding in parallel.
  • the airspace candidate is in the same MER as the current image block, a non-identical MER airspace candidate at a preset position is added.
  • airspace candidates are spatial candidates. Spatial candidates can be considered as a set of coordinates.
  • the spatial domain candidate includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block.
  • the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block.
  • the positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8.
  • the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 .
  • the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
  • (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first coding block, and (xN, yN) is also the coordinates of the current spatial domain candidate.
  • (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the current CU or PU.
  • (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current MER.
  • (xM, yM) indicates the coordinates of the second coding block, or the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xM, yM), (xM, yM) is the coordinates of the new spatial candidate.
  • (xN, yN) can be the coordinates of the upper left corner of the first encoding block
  • (xP, yP) can be the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current encoding block
  • (xMER, yMER) can be the upper left corner of the current MER.
  • the coordinates of the corner, then (xM, yM) is the coordinates of the upper left corner of the second coding block.
  • the coordinates of the above several blocks should be the values in the same coordinate system. This value can be an absolute value or a relative value relative to a point in the coordinate system, such as the origin of the coordinate system. No restrictions. And, in the same implementation, the above-mentioned several coordinates should be taken from the same position of these blocks, for example, all of them are the coordinates of the upper left corner of these blocks. In addition, the above coordinates may also be coordinates of other positions of the above blocks, such as the coordinates of the upper right corner, or the coordinates of the lower right corner, or the coordinates of the center point, etc., as long as it can indicate that the above blocks are in a coordinate system The position is sufficient, and this application is not limited. Therefore, the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block can be expressed by a mathematical relationship between xN and xP, and yN and yP.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example operation of a video decoder (for example, the video decoder 30 of FIG. 3) according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • a video decoder for example, the video decoder 30 of FIG. 3
  • One or more structural elements of video decoder 30 may be used to perform the technique of FIG. 9. This embodiment includes:
  • the division information of the coding block is the division information of the coding tree unit that is coded, and the division information determines how the coding tree unit is divided into multiple coding blocks, and the current coding block is the multiple One of the coding blocks.
  • the coding tree partition information is obtained by the video decoder 30 from the received code stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit in the video decoder 30 may perform this step.
  • the partition information may be a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multi-type tree (MTT) partition depth M of the current coding block. In this case, the current coding
  • the division depth of the block is identified by two independent values of QT, and MTT.
  • the division depth N of the current coding block is the sum of the QT division depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT division depth Dm of the current block.
  • the Db of the node is the root node of the node. If Db is increased by 1, if the node is a leaf node of MTT and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node. 2. Taking FIG.
  • the nodes are leaf nodes a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, and p that cannot be further divided.
  • the node may also be a node that needs to be further divided during the QT-MTT division process of the CTU. Taking FIG.
  • the nodes corresponding to f and g may be nodes corresponding to i and j, may be nodes corresponding to l, m, n, o, and p, may be nodes corresponding to l and m, and may be a, b, c, d,
  • the nodes corresponding to e, f, and g may be nodes corresponding to h, i, and j.
  • the embodiments of the present invention provide the following three manners for determining the area covered by the current MER according to the division depth N of the current node.
  • the first threshold T1 is a non-negative integer set in advance, and may be 0, 1, 2, or 3, for example.
  • the coordinates of the upper left corner (xK, yK) of the K-level quadtree node are:
  • xK xCb- (xCb & ((1 ⁇ K1) -1))
  • yK yCb- (yCb & ((1 ⁇ K1) -1))
  • the width and height of the K-level quadtree node are equal to (1 ⁇ K1).
  • the current CU may be determined as the current MER, and at this time, the current MER includes only one CU.
  • the division depth N of the current node There are two ways to determine the division depth N of the current node.
  • the QT depth of d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k is 1, and the QT depth of l, m, n, o, p is 2; the other is to divide the current node's depth N It is determined as the sum of the QT depth of the current node and the MTT depth of the current node, for example, the QT depth of the node k in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is 1, and the MTT depth is 0, so the partition depth N of the node k is 1; FIG. 7
  • the node a in the QT depth is 1, and the MTT depth is 2, so the partition depth N of the node a is 3.
  • the QT depth of the root node of the coding tree is 0. If a node in the QT coding tree is divided by QT, the QT depth of the child nodes obtained by division is the QT depth of the node plus 1; if a node in the QT does not use QT division, this node is a MTT root node.
  • the MTT root depth of the MTT node is 0; if a node on the MTT coding tree is divided by MTT, the MTT depth of the child node obtained is the MTT depth of the node plus 1, and the QT depth of the child node is the QT depth of the node . That is to say, starting from the CTU root node, the current node is obtained after S1 QT partition and S2 MTT partition, then the QT depth of the current node is S1, and the MTT depth is S2.
  • the MTT node with a depth of 1 includes: nodes corresponding to a and b (that is, a node including the area where a and b are located), nodes corresponding to c and d, nodes corresponding to e, f, and g, h Corresponding nodes, nodes corresponding to i and j, and nodes corresponding to l and nodes corresponding to m.
  • MTTdepth of 1 means that only the QT leaf nodes obtained after QT partitioning of the CTU can be obtained by performing MTT partitioning once; MTTdepth The node for 2 includes: a corresponding node, b corresponding node, c corresponding node, d corresponding node, e corresponding node, f corresponding node, g corresponding node, i corresponding node, and j corresponding node.
  • a MTT depth of 2 indicates a node obtained by performing a second MTT division on a QT leaf node obtained after QT division of a CTU.
  • the current motion estimation parallel region (referred to as the current MER) is determined as the region covered by the first parent node.
  • the first layer parent node PN (1) of the current CU is the parent node of the coding tree node where the current CU is located
  • the second layer parent node of the current CU is the parent node of the node PN (1)
  • so on that is, the current CU
  • the p-level parent node PN (p) of the PN is the parent node of the p-1 level parent node PN (p-1) of the coding tree node where the CU is currently located. For example, in FIG.
  • the first-level parent node of a is a node composed of a and b regions
  • the second-layer parent node of a is a node composed of a, b, c, d, e, f, and g regions.
  • the partition depth of a node is equal to the first threshold T1
  • the number of pixels (that is, the area of the MER) included in multiple MERs in the present invention may be different, and the size and position of the MER are related to the coding tree division.
  • the current CU may be determined as the current MER, and at this time, the current MER includes only one CU.
  • Method 3 Parse the coding tree partition information to obtain the first node. If the first node's partition depth N is equal to the first threshold T1, the first node is determined to be the current MER.
  • the current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER.
  • the above coding tree is, for example, a coding tree based on QT-MTT, and is also a coding tree based on MTT, for example.
  • the division depth of the first node can be determined in one of the following ways.
  • the division depth N of the first node may be the QT depth of the first node.
  • the condition that the first node determines that the current MER also includes the MTT depth of the first node is equal to 0, that is, if the division depth N of the first node is equal to the first threshold T1 and the MTT depth of the first node is equal to 0, the first A node is determined as the current MER.
  • the current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER, that is, the current coding unit is an MTT leaf node divided by the first node corresponding to the current MER.
  • the first node is determined as the current MER, that is, the position and size of the current MER are set to the position and size of the first node.
  • a first coding block where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to a spatial candidate of the current coding block; determining whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER; In a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the information of the current MER, it is determined to be close to the current MER airspace.
  • a second encoding block wherein the information of the MER includes coordinates of the MER; and a candidate list of spatial motion information is constructed based on the second encoding block, and the second encoding block is located outside the current MER.
  • the MER to which the airspace candidate belongs and the MER to which the current CU belongs are found. If the airspace candidate and the current PU belong to the same MER, the airspace candidate If not available, a new airspace candidate should be determined, and the new airspace candidate corresponds to the second coding block.
  • this process can check A0, and then check A0, B0, A1, B1, and B2 in sequence.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list includes a reference frame index, a motion vector, and a reference direction when a coding mode of a current coding block is a MERGE mode, and includes a motion vector when a coding mode of the current coding block is an AMVP mode.
  • an airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the second encoding block, and the airspace motion information candidate list may be constructed to be based on motion information of the second encoding block.
  • all coded blocks in the MER range use the same spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  • the following describes several ways of determining a second coding block that is close to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the information of the current MER.
  • the width of the current MER is expressed as wMER
  • the height of the current MER is expressed as hMER
  • the new spatial candidate coordinates, that is, the coordinates of the second coding block are expressed as (xM, yM), which can be determined by the following methods:
  • Method 1 If the current airspace candidate is on the left side of the current CU, that is, xN-xP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1), and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, then xM is equal to xMER-1 and yM is equal to yN. If the current airspace candidate is above and above the current CU, that is, xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero, and yN-yP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1), then xM is equal to xN and yM is equal to yMER-1.
  • xN-xP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1)
  • yN-yP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1)
  • xM A preset integer value equal to or greater than xMER-1 and less than xP
  • yM is a preset integer value equal to or greater than yMER-1 and less than yP.
  • Method 2 Calculate a new airspace candidate based on the upper left coordinate of MER and the width wMER and height hMER of MER.
  • yM is equal to yMER + hMER and xM is equal to xMER-1.
  • yM is equal to yMER + hMER-1 and xM is equal to xMER-1.
  • B 0 yM is equal to yMER-1 and xM is equal to xMER + wMER.
  • B 1 yM is equal to yMER-1 and xM is equal to xMER + wMER-1.
  • xM is equal to xMER-1 and yM is equal to yMER-1.
  • Method 3 If xN-xP is less than zero, determine the new spatial candidate coordinates as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where M is greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 2 * hMER. If xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, the new spatial candidate coordinates are determined to be (xMER + N, yMER-1), and then located on the MER from the preset pixel position (xMER + N, yMER-1) A new airspace candidate on the side, where N is an integer, greater than or equal to -1, and less than or equal to 2 * wMER.
  • Method 4 If xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, determine the new spatial candidate coordinates as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where M is greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 2 * hMER. If yN-yP is less than zero, the new airspace candidate coordinate is determined to be (xMER + N, yMER-1), and a new airspace candidate located on the upper side of MER is obtained from a preset pixel position (xMER + N, yMER-1). , Where N is an integer, greater than or equal to -1, and less than or equal to 2 * wMER.
  • the new airspace candidates and corresponding new coding blocks that can meet the requirements can be determined, thereby improving the efficiency of coding and decoding.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list After obtaining the airspace motion information candidate list, other candidates can also be added to the fusion motion information candidate list or motion vector prediction candidate list according to the existing related technologies. Other candidates include, but are not limited to, time domain candidates, zero motion information, etc. .
  • This process is prior art and can be performed with reference to the HEVC standard or VTM.
  • the candidate motion information list of the current coding block After the candidate motion information list of the current coding block is constructed, the motion information of the current CU is obtained. This step is a prior art, and the acquisition timing may be before the time domain motion information candidate list is constructed, and the current CU is merge / skip. In the mode, a corresponding fused motion information candidate is found from the fused motion information candidate list as motion information of the current CU according to a merge index in the code stream.
  • the motion vector prediction value is found from the motion vector prediction candidate list according to the motion vector prediction index in the code stream, and the motion vector difference value extracted from the code stream is used to obtain the motion vector.
  • the inter prediction image of the current block is obtained according to the motion information, and the inter prediction image and the residual image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block. More specifically, the decoding end: perform motion compensation (motion compensation) according to the motion information to obtain Predict the image. If a residual exists in the current block, the residual information and the predicted image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block; if the current block has no residual, the predicted image is a reconstructed image of the current block.
  • the above process is the prior art. For example, the same method as HEVC or VTM may be adopted, and other motion compensation and image reconstruction methods may also be adopted.
  • the beneficial effects of the present invention are: when the obtained airspace candidate is unavailable, it can be ensured that a new coding block corresponding to the newly available airspace candidate is obtained, and the same MER can include a complete coding unit, thereby performing a coding unit. In the process of constructing the candidate motion information list, as much candidate motion information as possible can be obtained to improve coding performance.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example operation of a video decoder (for example, the video decoder 30 of FIG. 3) according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • a video decoder for example, the video decoder 30 of FIG. 3
  • One or more structural elements of video decoder 30 may be used to perform the technique of FIG. 9. This embodiment includes:
  • the nodes that are further divided among the multiple nodes are parent nodes, and the nodes that are not further divided are leaf nodes.
  • the nodes are leaf nodes a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, and p that cannot be further divided.
  • the node may also be a node that needs to be further divided during the QT-MTT division of the CTU, that is, a parent node.
  • it may be a node corresponding to a and b, or a node corresponding to c and d.
  • the nodes corresponding to c, d, e, f, and g may be nodes corresponding to h, i, and j.
  • the first node may be the parent node or a leaf node.
  • An embodiment of the present invention provides the following additional manners for determining the area covered by the current MER according to the division depth N of the current node.
  • Method 4 Parse the coding tree partition information to obtain the first node. If the first node's partition depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the first node's partition method is a tri-tree partition method, the first node is determined to be the current node. MER; if the division depth N of the first node is equal to the second threshold T2, and the division mode of the first node is binary tree division or quadtree division, the first node is determined to be the current MER.
  • the current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER.
  • the Db of the MTT root node is equal to 0, and the Db of the child node is increased by 1 when the MTT node is divided by the binary tree division method. 1.
  • the Db of the child node is increased by 2.
  • the first node is determined to be the current MER.
  • the current MER contains only one CU.
  • Method 5 Parse the coding tree partition information to obtain the first node. If the partition depth N of the first node is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the partition method of the first node is a tri-tree partition or a quad-tree partition, then The first node is determined to be the current MER; if the partition depth N of the first node is equal to the third threshold T3, and the first node is partitioned into a binary tree, the first node is determined to be the current MER.
  • the current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER.
  • the Db of the MTT root node is equal to 0, and the Db of the child node is increased by 1 when the MTT node is divided by the binary tree division method. 1.
  • the Db of the child node is increased by 2.
  • the first node is determined to be the current MER.
  • the current MER contains only one CU.
  • the positional relationship between the current coding block and the current MER information determines a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace, wherein the MER information includes the coordinates of the MER; based on the second coding block Constructing an airspace motion information candidate list, where the second coding block is located outside the current MER;
  • step 1307 is the same as step 1205, please refer to step 1205 for details.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list After obtaining the airspace motion information candidate list, other candidates can also be added to the fusion motion information candidate list or motion vector prediction candidate list according to the existing related technologies. Other candidates include, but are not limited to, time domain candidates, zero motion information, etc. .
  • This process is prior art and can be performed with reference to the HEVC standard or VTM.
  • the candidate motion information list of the current coding block After the candidate motion information list of the current coding block is constructed, the motion information of the current CU is obtained. This step is a prior art, and the acquisition timing may be before the time domain motion information candidate list is constructed, and the current CU is merge / skip. In the mode, a corresponding fused motion information candidate is found from the fused motion information candidate list as motion information of the current CU according to a merge index in the code stream.
  • the motion vector prediction value is found from the motion vector prediction candidate list according to the motion vector prediction index in the code stream, and the motion vector difference value extracted from the code stream is used to obtain the motion vector.
  • the inter prediction image of the current block is obtained according to the motion information, and the inter prediction image and the residual image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block. More specifically, the decoding end: perform motion compensation (motion compensation) according to the motion information to obtain Predict the image. If a residual exists in the current block, the residual information and the predicted image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block; if the current block has no residual, the predicted image is a reconstructed image of the current block.
  • the above process is the prior art. For example, the same method as HEVC or VTM may be adopted, and other motion compensation and image reconstruction methods may also be adopted.
  • This step 1309 is the same as step 1207, please refer to step 1207 for details.
  • the decoding device 1400 includes:
  • a parsing module 1401, configured to obtain division information of a current coding block
  • a MER determination module 1403, configured to determine a current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information
  • the spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module 1405 is configured to determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and determining the current coding block and the first coding block. Whether the block belongs to the same MER; and in a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER To determine a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace, wherein the information of the MER includes the coordinates of the MER; and constructing a candidate list of spatial motion information based on the second coding block, the second coding block being located at Outside the current MER;
  • a reconstruction module 1407 is configured to predict and reconstruct the current coding unit according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  • decoding device 1400 For the specific implementation of the decoding device 1400, reference may be made to the method described in FIG. 12, and details are not described herein again.
  • the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block.
  • the airspace The motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: when xN-xP is less than zero, determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the The coordinates of the current MER, where M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER; in a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, determining the second encoding
  • the coordinates corresponding to the block are (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block)
  • (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block.
  • the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block.
  • the airspace The motion information candidate list building module is configured to determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M) when xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, where (( xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, M is an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER; and when yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined to be the same as the second
  • the coordinates corresponding to the coding block are
  • the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the MER
  • the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: : In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER); in the first encoding block In the case of being adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1); between the first encoding block and the current encoding When the upper right corners of the blocks are adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1); when the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block , The coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1); in the first encoding block When the upper left corner of the current coding block is adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1
  • (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block
  • (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block
  • (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER
  • the airspace motion information The candidate list building module is used for: when xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yN); and when xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero
  • the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xN, yMER-1); when xN-xP and yN-yP are both integers less than zero, all
  • the parsing module is configured to obtain a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multiple type tree (MTT) partition of the current coding block.
  • a depth M, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided M + N times;
  • the MER determination module is configured to: A threshold T1, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer, or when the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is greater than 0, the partition depth obtained by partitioning the coding tree unit is K first
  • the MER determination module is further configured to: when the quad-tree partition depth N is less than or equal to a first threshold T1, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, Then the current coding block is the current MER.
  • the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and an MTT partition depth Dm of the current block.
  • the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein a subunit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit Itself is the root node of the node, the node is called a leaf node if it does not continue to divide, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times;
  • the MER determination module is configured to: when the division depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtain the N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and use the N-T1 layer parent node The area covered is the current MER, wherein the parent node is a node
  • the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and an MTT partition depth Dm of the current block.
  • the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein a subunit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit Itself is the root node of the node, the node that is no longer divided is a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times;
  • the MER determination module is configured to: When the partition depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, the area covered by the node with the partition depth T1 in the coding tree unit is taken as the current MER, where T1 is a preset non-zero Positive integer.
  • a spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module is configured to determine whether the spatial domain neighboring block and the current coding block are located in the same MER, and if so, set the spatial domain neighboring block to be unavailable. Yes, if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring blocks.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention further provides a decoding device 1500 based on a motion estimation assessment region (MER). As shown in FIG. 15, the decoding device 1500 includes:
  • a parsing module 1501 configured to obtain division information of a coding tree unit
  • a division module 1503 configured to divide the coding tree unit to obtain multiple nodes according to the division information, among the multiple nodes, a node that is continuously divided is a parent node, and a node that is not further divided is a leaf node;
  • the MER determination module 1505 is configured to determine a first node whose division depth meets a preset condition, and use an area covered by the first node as the current MER of the first node.
  • the first node may be the parent node or Leaf node
  • the spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module 1507 is configured to determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the first node or A leaf node obtained by further dividing the first node; determining whether the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER; and in a case where the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER Determining a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, wherein the information of the MER includes the Coordinates of the MER; constructing a spatial motion information candidate list based on the second coding block, the second coding block being located outside the current MER;
  • a reconstruction module 1509 is configured to predict and reconstruct the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  • decoding device 1500 For the specific implementation of the decoding device 1500, reference may be made to the method described in FIG. 13, and details are not described herein again.
  • the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block.
  • the airspace The motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: when xN-xP is less than zero, determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the The coordinates of the current MER, where M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER; in a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, determining the second encoding
  • the coordinates corresponding to the block are (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block)
  • (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block.
  • the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block.
  • the airspace The motion information candidate list building module is configured to determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M) when xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, where (( xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, M is an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER; and when yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined to be the same as the second
  • the coordinates corresponding to the coding block are
  • the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the MER
  • the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: : In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER); in the first encoding block In the case of being adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1); between the first encoding block and the current encoding When the upper right corners of the blocks are adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1); when the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block , The coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1); in the first encoding block When the upper left corner of the current coding block is adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1
  • (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block
  • (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block
  • (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER
  • the airspace motion information The candidate list building module is used for: when xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yN); and when xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero
  • the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xN, yMER-1); when xN-xP and yN-yP are both integers less than zero, all
  • the division depth includes independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth).
  • the MER determination module is configured to: It is determined that the first node whose QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT depth is equal to 0, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
  • the division depth is a sum of a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), and the MER determination module is configured to: Determining a first node having a partition depth equal to the preset condition and further divided into a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, and using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is the One of multiple MTT leaf nodes.
  • QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth quad-tree Depth, QT depth
  • MTT Depth multi-type division depth
  • the partition depth N Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is the quadtree partition depth of the node, and Db is the multi-type partition depth of the node. If the node is MTT Root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if When a node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree partition method, Db of the node is Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is MTT When the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2; the MER determination module is used to determine the division
  • the depth N is
  • the MER determination module is further configured to determine that the partition depth N is less than or equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1 and is the first node of the leaf node, and uses the area covered by the first node as The MER of the first node.
  • the partition depth N Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is the quadtree partition depth of the node, and Db is the multi-type partition depth of the node. If the node is MTT Root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if When a node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree partition method, Db of the node is Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is MTT When the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2; the MER determination module is used to determine the division
  • the depth N is
  • the MER determination module is configured to determine a first node whose division depth N is less than or equal to a third threshold T3 and is the leaf node, and use an area covered by the first node as the first node MER.
  • the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to determine whether the airspace neighboring block and the current coding block are located in the same MER, and if so, set the airspace neighboring block as Not available, if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring blocks.
  • An embodiment of the present invention further provides a video decoder, which includes an execution circuit for performing any one of the foregoing methods.
  • An embodiment of the present invention further provides a video decoder, including: at least one processor; and a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium coupled to the at least one processor, the non-volatile computer-readable storage
  • the medium stores a computer program executable by the at least one processor, and when the computer program is executed by the at least one processor, causes the video decoder to perform any one of the methods described above.
  • An embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program executable by a processor, and when the computer program is executed by the at least one processor, performing any one of the foregoing methods. .
  • An embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, any one of the foregoing methods is performed.
  • a computer-readable medium may include a computer-readable storage medium, which corresponds to a tangible medium such as a data storage medium or a communication medium including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another, according to a communication protocol, for example.
  • computer-readable media generally may correspond to (1) tangible computer-readable storage media that is non-transitory, or (2) a communication medium such as a signal or carrier wave.
  • a data storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, codes, and / or data structures used to implement the techniques described in this disclosure.
  • the computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
  • such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures Any other media that requires program code and is accessible by the computer.
  • any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source
  • Coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of the medium.
  • the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media.
  • magnetic disks and compact discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), flexible discs and Blu-ray discs, where the discs are usually magnetic The data is reproduced, while the optical disk uses a laser to reproduce the data optically. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
  • processors such as one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), general purpose microprocessors, application specific integrated circuits , ASIC), field programmable logic array (field programmable logic arrays, FPGA) or other equivalent integrated or discrete logic circuits.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable logic arrays
  • processors may refer to any of the above-described structures or any other structure suitable for implementing the techniques described herein.
  • the functionality described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and / or software modules for encoding and decoding, or incorporated in a composite codec. Also, the techniques could be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
  • the techniques of this disclosure may be implemented in a variety of devices or devices that include a wireless handset, an integrated circuit (IC), or a collection of ICs (eg, a chipset).
  • IC integrated circuit
  • the present disclosure describes various components, modules, or units to emphasize functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed techniques, but does not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units.
  • the various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and / or firmware, or provided by a collection of interoperable hardware units, which include as described above One or more processors.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed is a decoding method based on a motion estimation region (MER). The method comprises: acquiring division information of a current coding block; determining, according to the division information, a current MER to which the current coding block belongs; determining whether the current coding block and a first coding block corresponding to a selected spatial candidate belong to the same MER; determining a second coding block adjacent to a spatial domain of the current MER; constructing a spatial domain motion information candidate list based on a coding block adjacent to a spatial domain of the current coding block, wherein the coding block adjacent to the spatial domain is located outside the current MER; and predicting and reconstructing the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list. In the method provided in the present invention, when a selected spatial candidate is unavailable, a coding block corresponding to a spatial candidate which is not in a current MER is re-obtained, so that the spatial candidate is finally available to construct a spatial domain motion information candidate list, and it can be ensured that the same MER can comprise a complete coding block, and thus, as much candidate motion information as possible can be acquired during the process of constructing the spatial domain motion information candidate list of the coding block, so as to improve the coding performance.

Description

视频解码方法及视频解码器Video decoding method and video decoder 技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例大体上涉及视频编码领域,更确切地说,涉及视频解码方法及视频解码器。The embodiments of the present application generally relate to the field of video coding, and more specifically, to a video decoding method and a video decoder.
背景技术Background technique
视频编码(视频编码和解码)广泛用于数字视频应用,例如广播数字电视、互联网和移动网络上的视频传播、视频聊天和视频会议等实时会话应用、DVD和蓝光光盘、视频内容采集和编辑系统以及可携式摄像机的安全应用。Video encoding (video encoding and decoding) is widely used in digital video applications, such as broadcast digital TV, video transmission on the Internet and mobile networks, real-time conversation applications such as video chat and video conferencing, DVD and Blu-ray discs, video content acquisition and editing systems And security applications for camcorders.
随着1990年H.261标准中基于块的混合型视频编码方式的发展,新的视频编码技术和工具得到发展并为新的视频编码标准形成基础。其它视频编码标准包括MPEG-1视频、MPEG-2视频、ITU-T H.262/MPEG-2、ITU-T H.263、ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4第10部分高级视频编码(Advanced Video Coding,AVC)、ITU-T H.265/高效视频编码(High Efficiency Video Coding,HEVC)…以及此类标准的扩展,例如可扩展性和/或3D(three-dimensional)扩展。随着视频创建和使用变得越来越广泛,视频流量成为通信网络和数据存储的最大负担。因此大多数视频编码标准的目标之一是相较之前的标准,在不牺牲图片质量的前提下减少比特率。即使最新的高效视频编码(High Efficiency video coding,HEVC)可以在不牺牲图片质量的前提下比AVC大约多压缩视频一倍,仍然亟需新技术相对HEVC进一步压缩视频。With the development of the block-based hybrid video coding method in the H.261 standard in 1990, new video coding technologies and tools have been developed and formed the basis for the new video coding standard. Other video coding standards include MPEG-1 video, MPEG-2 video, ITU-T H.262 / MPEG-2, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264 / MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding ( Advanced Video Coding (AVC), ITU-T H.265 / High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) ... and extensions to such standards, such as scalability and / or three-dimensional (3D) extensions. As video creation and usage becomes more widespread, video traffic becomes the biggest burden on communication networks and data storage. Therefore, one of the goals of most video coding standards is to reduce the bit rate without sacrificing picture quality compared to previous standards. Even though the latest High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) can compress video about twice as much as AVC without sacrificing picture quality, new technologies are still needed to further compress video relative to HEVC.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本申请实施例提供视频解码方法及视频解码器,可以提高解码效率。The embodiments of the present application provide a video decoding method and a video decoder, which can improve decoding efficiency.
前述和其它目标通过独立权利要求的主题实现。其它实现方式通过从属权利要求、说明书以及附图是显而易见的。The foregoing and other objects are achieved by the subject matter of the independent claims. Other implementations are apparent from the dependent claims, the description and the drawings.
第一方面,本发明涉及视频解码方法,该解码方法可以有视频解码器来执行。所述方法为一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码方法。其包括:获取当前编码块的划分信息;根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER;确定第一编码块,所述第一编码块为所述当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;In a first aspect, the invention relates to a video decoding method, which may be performed by a video decoder. The method is a decoding method based on a Motion Estimation Region (MER). It includes: obtaining partition information of a current coding block; determining a current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the partition information; determining a first coding block, where the first coding block is a spatial domain candidate corresponding to the current coding block A coding block; determining whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER;
在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。In a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, it is determined that A second coding block adjacent to the MER space, wherein the information of the MER includes the coordinates of the MER; and a candidate list of spatial motion information is constructed based on the second coding block, and the second coding block is located outside the current MER ; Predicting and reconstructing the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
本发明提供的视频解码方法可以在选定的一个空域候选对应的编码块与当前编码块属于同一MER的情况下,重新选择一个在该MER之外的编码块来构建空域运动信息候选列表,从而确保选用构建空域运动信息候选列表的编码块是合适的,从而提高了编解码的效率。The video decoding method provided by the present invention can re-select a coding block outside the MER to build a spatial motion information candidate list in the case that a selected coding block corresponding to the spatial domain candidate and the current coding block belong to the same MER, thereby It is ensured that the coding block used to construct the candidate list of spatial motion information is appropriate, thereby improving the efficiency of encoding and decoding.
其中,空域候选,即spatial candidates。空域候选可以认为一个坐标集合。空域候选中包括多个坐标点,每个坐标点的坐标可以指示一个编码块的位置。一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块。该多个空域临近块与当前编码块之间的位置关系如图8所示,图中该多个空域临近块就是A 0,A 1,B 0,B 1,B 2。另一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选包括更多的坐标点,也就是说,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块,还包括位于该当前编码块附近的其他空域块。 Among them, airspace candidates are spatial candidates. Spatial candidates can be considered as a set of coordinates. The spatial domain candidate includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block. In an implementation manner, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block. The positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8. The multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 . In another implementation manner, the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
以下为在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,几种可能的确定出第二编码块的实现方式。其中,(xN,yN)具体可以是第一编码块左上角的坐标,(xP,yP)具体可以是当前编码块左上角的坐标,(xMER,yMER)具体可以是当前MER左上角的坐标,第二编码块对应的坐标,可以表示为(xM,yM),具体可以是第二编码块左上角的坐标。上述几个块的坐标应当是在同一坐标系下的值,这个值可以是绝对值,也可以是相对于该坐标系中的某一点的相对值,例如相对该坐标系的原点等,本申请不做限制,。并且,在同一种实现方式中,上述几个块的坐标应都取自这些块的相同位置,例如全都是这些块右上角的坐标,或者右下角的坐标,或者中心点的坐标等等,本申请不做限定。因此,第一编码块和当前编码块的位置关系,可以用xN和xP,以及yN和yP之间的数学关系表示。The following are several possible implementation manners for determining the second encoding block when the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER. Among them, (xN, yN) may be specifically the coordinates of the upper left corner of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) may be specifically the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) may be specifically the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current MER, The coordinates corresponding to the second coding block may be expressed as (xM, yM), and may specifically be the coordinates of the upper left corner of the second coding block. The coordinates of the above several blocks should be the values in the same coordinate system. This value can be an absolute value or a relative value relative to a point in the coordinate system, such as the origin of the coordinate system. Without restrictions. And, in the same implementation, the coordinates of the above several blocks should be taken from the same position of these blocks, for example, all the coordinates of the upper right corner of these blocks, or the coordinates of the lower right corner, or the coordinates of the center point, etc. Applications are not limited. Therefore, the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block can be expressed by a mathematical relationship between xN and xP, and yN and yP.
根据第一方面,在所述方法可能的实现方式中,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。According to a first aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the method, the information of the current MER further includes a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates a coordinate of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and determines a second encoding adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the current MER information The block includes: if xN-xP is less than zero, determining a coordinate corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates a coordinate of the current MER, M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER; and in the case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, determining the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block is (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, N is an integer, N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
根据第一方面,在所述方法可能的实现方式中,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。According to a first aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the method, the information of the current MER further includes a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates a coordinate of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and determines a second encoding adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the current MER information A block including: in a case where xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, determining a coordinate corresponding to the second encoding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates For the coordinates of the current MER, M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER; and when yN-yP is less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are determined. Is (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
根据第一方面,在所述方法可能的实现方式中,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。According to a first aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the method, the information of the current MER further includes a width and a height of the MER, and the first coding block is a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. One, the determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block and the current MER information includes: When a coding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current coding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER); between the first coding block and the current coding block When the left edges of the blocks are adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1); the upper right corner of the first encoding block and the current encoding block are in phase with each other. In the case of the neighbor, the coordinate corresponding to the second encoding block is (xMER + wMER, yMER-1); in the case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper side of the current encoding block, the second The coordinates corresponding to the coding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1); between the first coding block and the current coding block When the upper left corner is adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1); where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, hMER indicates the height of the MER, wMER indicates the width of the MER.
根据第一方面,在所述方法可能的实现方式中,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:According to a first aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the method, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates coordinates of the current encoding block, (xMER, yMER) ) Indicating the coordinates of the current MER, and determining a second encoding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the information of the current MER, include:
在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);When xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yN);
在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xN, yMER-1);
在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。When both xN-xP and yN-yP are integers smaller than zero, the coordinate range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is greater than An integer equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
使用上述几种方式,都可以确定出可用的第二编码块。By using the above several methods, the available second coding block can be determined.
根据第一方面,在所述方法可能的实现方式中,所述获取当前编码块的划分信息包括:获取当前编码块的四叉树(Quad-Tree,QT)划分深度N以及所述当前编码块的多类型树(Multiple Type Tree,MTT)划分深度M,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过M+N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个。对应的确定所述MER的过程包括:若所述四叉树划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数,或者所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M大于0,则将由所述编码树单元划分得到的划分深度为K的第一子单元所述覆盖的区域作为所述MER,其中,K=min(N,T1),min(a,b)表示取a和b中的较小值,所述第一子单元包含所述当前编码单元。According to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the method, the acquiring the partition information of the current coding block includes: acquiring a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and the current coding block Multiple Type Tree (MTT) partition depth M, the current coding block is one of multiple coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is partitioned M + N times. The corresponding process of determining the MER includes: if the quad-tree partition depth N is greater than a first threshold T1, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is greater than 0 , Then the area covered by the first sub-unit with a division depth of K obtained by dividing the coding tree unit is used as the MER, where K = min (N, T1), min (a, b) means taking a And a smaller value of b, the first subunit includes the current coding unit.
在上述实现方式中,将经过四差树划分的子单元所在的范围确定为MER,能够有效保证在该MER中的编码块不超出该MER,该MER中也不包含别的MER中的子单元,从而有效保证运动列表的构建过程中的可用的候选运动信息的多样性。具体的,所述第K层四叉树节点的左上角坐标(xK,yK)为:xK=xCb-(xCb&((1<<K1)-1));yK=yCb-(yCb&((1<<K1)-1)),其中,xCb和yCb表示当前节点的左上角坐标(xCb,yCb),K1=log2(CTUSize)–K。所述第K层四叉树节点的宽和高等于(1<<K1)。In the above implementation manner, determining the range of the sub-units divided by the four-difference tree as the MER can effectively ensure that the coding block in the MER does not exceed the MER, and the MER does not include the sub-units in other MERs. , Thereby effectively ensuring the diversity of candidate motion information available in the construction of the motion list. Specifically, the coordinates of the upper left corner of the K-layer quadtree node (xK, yK) are: xK = xCb- (xCb & ((1 << K1) -1)); yK = yCb- (yCb & ((1 << K1) -1)), where xCb and yCb represent the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current node (xCb, yCb), K1 = log2 (CTUSize) -K. The width and height of the K-level quadtree node are equal to (1 << K1).
除此,之外,以下的多种可选方式,可以达到相同的效果。In addition, the following multiple options can achieve the same effect.
根据第一方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER还包括:若所述四叉树划分深度N小于或者等于第一阈值T1,或者所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M等于0,则所述当前编码块即为所述当前MER。According to the first aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manner, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the partition information further includes: if the quad-tree partitioning If the depth N is less than or equal to the first threshold T1, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, then the current coding block is the current MER.
根据第一方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述获取当前编码块的划分信息包括:获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,所述节点若不再继续划分则称之为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER包括:若所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,则获取所述当前编码块的第N-T1层父节点,以所述第N-T1层父节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中,所述父节点为包含所述当前编码块所在节点的且划分深度小于N的节点,与所述当前编码块所在节点紧邻的父节点为所述当前编码块的第1层父节点。According to the first aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manner, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the acquiring the partition information of the current coding block includes: acquiring a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is The sum of the QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT partition depth Dm of the current block, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, where The sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is the root node of the node. If the node does not continue to divide, it is called a leaf node. The current coding block is One of a plurality of leaf nodes after the encoding unit is divided N times; and determining the current MER to which the current encoding block belongs according to the division information includes: if the division depth N of the current encoding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtain the N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and use the area covered by the N-T1 layer parent node as the current MER, where the parent node contains the current MER Code block and the node where the split node depth of less than N, the node of the current encoding block is located immediately adjacent to the parent node of the parent node of the current level of the first encoded block.
该实施方式中提供了另外一种确定MER的计算方式,即,以当前节点为起点,通过逆向递归的方式找到MER的节点的位置。This embodiment provides another calculation method for determining the MER, that is, using the current node as a starting point, and finding the position of the MER's node in a reverse recursive manner.
根据第一方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述获取当前编码块的划分信息包括:获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,不再继续划分的节点为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER包括:若所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,则将所述编码树单元中划分深度为T1的节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数。According to the first aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manner, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the acquiring the partition information of the current coding block includes: acquiring a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is The sum of the QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT partition depth Dm of the current block, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, where The sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, the coding tree unit itself is the root node of the node, the node that is no longer divided is a leaf node, and the current coding block is that the coding unit passes N One of a plurality of leaf nodes after the second division; determining the current MER to which the current encoding block belongs according to the division information includes: if the division depth N of the current encoding block is greater than a first threshold T1, An area covered by a node with a division depth T1 in the coding tree unit is used as the current MER, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer.
该实现方式为一种简化实现方式,即,通过T1直接确定MER的范围,可以进化实现的复杂度。This implementation is a simplified implementation, that is, the complexity of the implementation can be evolved by directly determining the range of the MER through T1.
根据第一方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述基于当前编码块的空域邻近的编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,包括:判断所述空域邻近块与所述当前编码块是否位于同于MER中,若是,则将所述空域相邻块设置为不可用,若否,则基于所述空域相邻块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。According to the first aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manner, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on a spatial-domain neighboring coding block of the current coding block includes: determining the spatial-domain neighboring block Whether the current coding block is located in the same MER, if yes, the airspace neighboring block is set as unavailable; if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring block .
第二方面,本发明涉及视频解码方法,该解码方法可以有视频解码器来执行一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码方法,其包括:获取编码树单元的划分信息;根据所述划分信息对所述编码树单元划分得到多个节点,所述多个节点中被继续划分的节点为父节点,未被进一步划分的节点为叶节点;确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的当前MER,所述第一节点可以为所述父节点或者叶节点;确定第一编码块,其中,所述第一编码块为当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块,所述当前编码块为所述第一节点或者所述第一节点经过进一步划分得到的叶子节点;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。其中,空域候选,即spatial candidates。其中包括多个坐标点,每个坐标点的坐标可以指示一个编码块的位置。一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块。该多个空域临近块与当前编码块之间的位置关系如图8所示,图中该多个空域临近块就是A 0,A 1,B 0,B 1,B 2。另一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选包括更多的坐标点,也就是说,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块,还包括位于该当前编码块附近的其他空域块。 In a second aspect, the present invention relates to a video decoding method. The decoding method may have a video decoder to perform a decoding method based on a Motion Estimation Region MER, which includes: obtaining division information of a coding tree unit; The partition information is used to divide the coding tree unit to obtain multiple nodes. Among the multiple nodes, a node that is continuously divided is a parent node, and a node that is not further divided is a leaf node. A node, and using the area covered by the first node as the current MER of the first node, the first node may be the parent node or a leaf node; determining a first encoding block, wherein the first encoding A block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the first node or a leaf node obtained by further dividing the first node; determining the current coding block and the first Whether the coding block belongs to the same MER; and in a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the first MER A position relationship between a code block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, determine a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace, wherein the information of the MER includes coordinates of the MER; The second coding block constructs a spatial motion information candidate list, and the second coding block is located outside the current MER; and the current coding block is predicted and reconstructed according to the spatial motion information candidate list. Among them, airspace candidates are spatial candidates. It includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block. In an implementation manner, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block. The positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8. The multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 . In another implementation manner, the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
其中,空域候选,即spatial candidates。空域候选可以认为一个坐标集合。空域候选中包括多个坐标点,每个坐标点的坐标可以指示一个编码块的位置。一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块。该多个空域临近块与当前编码块之间的位置关系如图8所示,图中该多个空域临近块就是A 0,A 1,B 0,B 1,B 2。另一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选包括更多的坐标点,也就是说,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块,还包括位于该当前编码块附近的其他空域块。 Among them, airspace candidates are spatial candidates. Spatial candidates can be considered as a set of coordinates. The spatial domain candidate includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block. In an implementation manner, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block. The positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8. The multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 . In another implementation manner, the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
第二方面中,在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,几种可能的确定出第二编码块的实现方式与第一方面相同,其实现和相关说明请参照相关段落,此处不再赘述。In the second aspect, in a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, several possible implementation manners for determining the second coding block are the same as those in the first aspect. For implementation and related descriptions, please Reference is made to relevant paragraphs, which will not be repeated here.
第二方面提供另一种基于MER的解码方法,其区别在于MER的确定机制不同,具体地,该MER的确定方式可以先于当前解码单元的处理过程,也即,MER的信息对编码树单元划分的过程中确定,并记录下来,而在构建当前编码单元的空域运动信息候选列表时,直接调用存储的MER信息即可。所述方法包括:The second aspect provides another MER-based decoding method. The difference lies in that the MER determination mechanism is different. Specifically, the MER determination method may precede the processing process of the current decoding unit, that is, the information of the MER on the coding tree unit. It is determined and recorded during the division process, and when constructing the spatial motion information candidate list of the current coding unit, the stored MER information can be directly called. The method includes:
根据第二方面,在所述方法可能的实现方式中,所述划分深度包括独立的四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth),以及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth),所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定QT depth等于所述预设条件且所述MTT Depth深度等于0的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。According to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the method, the division depth includes an independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth) ), The determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT depth is The first node equal to 0 uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node.
根据第二方面,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述划分深度为四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth)及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth)之和,所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定划分深度等于所述预设条件且被进一步划分为多个MTT叶节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述当前编码块为所述多个MTT叶节点中的一个节点.According to the second aspect, in another possible implementation of the method, the division depth is a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth) In sum, determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth is equal to the preset condition and is further divided into A first node of a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is one of the plurality of MTT leaf nodes.
根据第二方面,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树 划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定划分深度N等于第二阈值T2减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第二阈值T2,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T2为大于1的正整数。According to a second aspect, in another possible implementation of the method, the partition depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree partition depth of the node, and Db is a multiple of the node Depth of type division. If the node is a MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the node. The Db of the root node is increased by 1. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the root node of the node. Db plus 1, if the node is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2 ; Determining that the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the division method is The first node of the tri-tree partitioning method, The area covered by a node is used as the MER of the first node, or it is determined that the partition depth N is equal to the second threshold T2, and the first node is divided into a binary tree or a quad tree, and the first node is The covered area is taken as the MER of the first node, where T2 is a positive integer greater than 1.
根据第二方面,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括进一步包括:确定划分深度N小于或者等于第二阈值T2减1且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。According to a second aspect, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the determining a first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node includes further The method includes determining that the division depth N is less than or equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1 and is the first node of the leaf node, and uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node.
根据第二方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定划分深度N等于第三阈值T3减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第三阈值T3,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T3为大于1的正整数。According to the second aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manner, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the partition depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree partition depth of the node, Db For the multi-type partition depth of the node, if the node is a MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is obtained by a binary tree partitioning method, the The Db of a node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1. If the node is a leaf node of an MTT and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division, the Db of the node Add 1 to the Db of the root node of the node. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the node. The Db of the root node is increased by 2; determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth N is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the division method is a tri-tree division method Or the first node of the quad tree partition method, using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, or determining that the partition depth N is equal to the third threshold T3, and the partition method is the first node of the binary tree partition method. A node, using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, where T3 is a positive integer greater than 1.
根据第二方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括进一步包括:确定划分深度N小于或者等于第三阈值T3且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。According to the second aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manners, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the determining a first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using an area covered by the first node as a first The MER of a node further includes: determining that the division depth N is less than or equal to the third threshold T3 and is the first node of the leaf node, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node.
根据第二方面,结合前述的实现方式,在所述方法可能的另一实现方式中,所述基于当前编码块的空域邻近的编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,包括:判断所述空域邻近块与所述当前编码块是否位于同于MER中,若是,则将所述空域相邻块设置为不可用,若否,则基于所述空域相邻块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。According to the second aspect, in combination with the foregoing implementation manner, in another possible implementation manner of the method, the constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on a spatial-domain neighboring coding block of the current coding block includes: determining the spatial-domain neighboring block Whether the current coding block is located in the same MER, if yes, the airspace neighboring block is set as unavailable; if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring block .
第三方面,本发明提供一种解码装置,其包括与第一方面的方法所对应的各种模块,所述各种模块具备实现所述方法各个步骤的功能。According to a third aspect, the present invention provides a decoding device including various modules corresponding to the method of the first aspect, and the various modules are provided with functions for implementing each step of the method.
一种实现方式下,所述解析模块用于:获取当前编码块的四叉树(Quad-Tree,QT)划分深度N以及所述当前编码块的多类型树(Multiple Type Tree,MTT)划分深度M,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过M+N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个;In an implementation manner, the parsing module is configured to obtain a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multiple type tree (MTT) partition depth of the current coding block. M, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is partitioned M + N times;
所述MER确定模块,用于,在所述四叉树划分深度N大于第一阈值T1时,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数,或者在所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M大于0时,则将由所述编码树单元划分得到的划分深度为K的第一子单元所述覆盖的区域作为所述MER,其中,K=min(N,T1),min(a,b)表示取a和b中的较小值,所述第一子单元包含所述当前编码单元。The MER determination module is configured to: when the quadtree partition depth N is greater than a first threshold T1, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is greater than When it is 0, the area covered by the first sub-unit with a division depth of K obtained by dividing the coding tree unit is used as the MER, where K = min (N, T1), min (a, b) represents Take the smaller of a and b, the first subunit contains the current coding unit.
一种实现方式下,所述MER确定模块,还用于在所述四叉树划分深度N小于或者等于第一阈值T1时,或者所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M等于0,则所述当前编码块即为所述当前MER。In an implementation manner, the MER determination module is further configured to: when the quadtree partition depth N is less than or equal to the first threshold T1, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, then The current coding block is the current MER.
一种实现方式下,所述解析模块,用于获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,所述节点若不再继续划分则称之为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;所述MER确定模块用于,在所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1时,则获取所述当前编码块的第N-T1层父节点,以所述第N-T1层父节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中,所述父节点为包含所述当前编码块所在节点的且划分深度小于N的节点,与所述当前编码块所在节点紧邻的父节点为所述当前编码块的第1层父节点。In an implementation manner, the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of a current coding block, where the partition depth N is a sum of a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and a MTT partition depth Dm of the current block. The current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein the sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is The root node of the node, if the node is no longer divided, it is called a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times; the MER determines The module is configured to: when the division depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtain the N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and use the N-T1 layer parent node to cover The region is the current MER, wherein the parent node is a node containing the node where the current coding block is located and the division depth is less than N, and the parent node immediately adjacent to the node where the current coding block is located is the current coding block. Tier 1 parent Point.
一种实现方式下,所述解析模块,用于获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,不再继续划分的节点为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;所述MER确定模块用于,在所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1时,则将所述编码树单元中划分深度为T1的节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数。In an implementation manner, the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of a current coding block, where the partition depth N is a sum of a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and a MTT partition depth Dm of the current block. The current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein the sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is The root node of the node, the node that is no longer divided is a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times; the MER determination module is configured to: When the partition depth N of the current coding block is greater than the first threshold T1, the area covered by the node with the partition depth T1 in the coding tree unit is used as the current MER, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer .
一种实现方式下,在所述基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表的方面,所述空域运动信息 候选列表构建模块,用于基于所述第二编码块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。In an implementation manner, in the aspect of constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on the second encoding block, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to construct the airspace motion information candidate list based on the motion information of the second encoding block. Airspace motion information candidate list.
第四方面,本发明提供一种解码装置,其包括与第二方面的方法所对应的各种模块,所述各种模块具备实现所述方法各个步骤的功能。In a fourth aspect, the present invention provides a decoding device including various modules corresponding to the method of the second aspect, and the various modules are provided with functions for implementing each step of the method.
一种实现方式下,所述划分深度包括独立的四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth),以及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth),所述MER确定模块用于确定QT depth等于所述预设条件且所述MTT Depth深度等于0的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。In an implementation manner, the division depth includes independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), and the MER determination module is used for It is determined that the first node whose QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT depth is equal to 0, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
一种实现方式下,所述划分深度为四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth)及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth)之和,所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度等于所述预设条件且被进一步划分为多个MTT叶节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述当前编码块为所述多个MTT叶节点中的一个节点。In an implementation manner, the division depth is a sum of a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), and the MER determination module is configured to determine A first node whose division depth is equal to the preset condition and is further divided into a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, and an area covered by the first node is used as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is the multi-node One of the MTT leaf nodes.
一种实现方式下,所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度N等于第二阈值T2减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第二阈值T2,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T2为大于1的正整数。In an implementation manner, the division depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree division depth of the node, Db is a multi-type division depth of the node, and if the node is an MTT root Node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by the binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node Is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is an MTT When the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2; the MER determination module is used to determine the division depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the first node is divided into three branches, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node, or the partition depth N is determined to be equal to the second threshold. T2, and the division mode is binary tree division mode or The first node of the quadtree partitioning method uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, where T2 is a positive integer greater than 1.
一种实现方式下,所述MER确定模块进一步用于确定划分深度N小于或者等于第二阈值T2减1且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。In an implementation manner, the MER determination module is further configured to determine a first node that is a leaf node that is less than or equal to a second threshold T2 minus 1 and uses the area covered by the first node as the first node. The MER of a node.
一种实现方式下,所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度N等于第三阈值T3减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第三阈值T3,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T3为大于1的正整数。In an implementation manner, the division depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is a quad-tree division depth of the node, Db is a multi-type division depth of the node, and if the node is an MTT root Node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by the binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node Is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is an MTT When the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2; the MER determination module is used to determine the division depth N is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the division method is the first node of the tri-tree division method or the quad-tree division method, using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, or determining the division depth N Is equal to the third threshold T3, and the division mode is The first node of the binary tree division method uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, where T3 is a positive integer greater than 1.
一种实现方式下,所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度N小于或者等于第三阈值T3且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。In an implementation manner, the MER determination module is configured to determine that the division depth N is less than or equal to a third threshold T3 and is the first node of the leaf node, and uses the area covered by the first node as the first node's MER.
结合本方面上述的任一种实现方式,一种实现方式下,在所述基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块,用于基于所述第二编码块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。With reference to any of the foregoing implementation manners in this aspect, in one implementation manner, in the aspect of constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on the second coding block, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to The motion information of the second coding block constructs the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
第五方面,本发明涉及解码视频流的装置,包含处理器和存储器。所述存储器存储指令,所述指令使得所述处理器执行根据第一方面或者第二方面的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present invention relates to a device for decoding a video stream, including a processor and a memory. The memory stores instructions that cause the processor to execute the method according to the first aspect or the second aspect.
第六方面,本发明提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上储存有指令,所述指令执行时,使得一个或多个处理器编码视频数据。所述指令使得所述一个或多个处理器执行根据第一或第二方面或第一或第二方面任何可能实施例的方法。According to a sixth aspect, the present invention provides a computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon instructions that, when executed, cause one or more processors to encode video data. The instructions cause the one or more processors to perform a method according to the first or second aspect or any possible embodiment of the first or second aspect.
第七方面,本发明涉及包括程序代码的计算机程序,所述程序代码在计算机上运行时执行根据第一或第二方面或第一或第二方面任何可能实施例的方法。In a seventh aspect, the invention relates to a computer program comprising program code which, when run on a computer, performs a method according to the first or second aspect or any possible embodiment of the first or second aspect.
第八方面,本发明提供一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码方法,其包括:获取当前编码块的划分信息;根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER;In an eighth aspect, the present invention provides a decoding method based on a motion estimation assessment region (MER), which includes: obtaining division information of a current encoding block; and determining the current MER to which the current encoding block belongs according to the division information. ;
基于所述当前MER的空域邻近的编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,其中所述空域邻近的编码块位于所述当前MER之外;根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码单元进行预测及重建。Construct an airspace motion information candidate list based on the airspace neighboring coding blocks of the current MER, wherein the airspace neighboring coding blocks are located outside the current MER; and predict the current coding unit according to the airspace motion information candidate list And reconstruction.
基于第八方面的一种实施方式中,所述MER范围内的所有编码块使用相同的空域运动信息候选列表。In an embodiment based on the eighth aspect, all coding blocks in the MER range use the same spatial motion information candidate list.
在附图及以下说明中阐述一个或多个实施例的细节。其它特征、目的和优点通过说明书、附图以及权利要求是显而易见的。The details of one or more embodiments are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects, and advantages will be apparent from the description, the drawings, and the claims.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或背景技术中的技术方案,下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。In order to more clearly explain the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application or the background art, the drawings that are needed in the embodiments of the present application or the background art will be described below.
图1是用于实现本发明实施例的视频编码系统实例的框图;FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an example of a video encoding system for implementing an embodiment of the present invention;
图2是示出用于实现本发明实施例的视频编码器实例结构的框图;2 is a block diagram showing an example structure of a video encoder for implementing an embodiment of the present invention;
图3是示出用于实现本发明实施例的视频解码器实例结构的框图;3 is a block diagram showing an example structure of a video decoder for implementing an embodiment of the present invention;
图4是绘示包含图2的编码器20和图3的解码器30FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and the decoder 30 of FIG. 3.
图5是绘示另一种编码装置或解码装置实例的框图;5 is a block diagram illustrating another example of an encoding device or a decoding device;
图6是二叉树,三叉树以及四叉树的划分方式示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a division manner of a binary tree, a triple tree, and a quad tree;
图7是QT-MTT划分示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of QT-MTT division;
图8是空域相邻块以及时域相邻块的示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of an adjacent block in the space domain and an adjacent block in the time domain;
图9是基于MER确定可用候选者示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of determining available candidates based on MER;
图10是MER的划分示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of MER division;
图11是QT-MTT划分模式先MER与编码块的示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a first MER and a coding block in a QT-MTT partitioning mode; FIG.
图12为本发明实施例提供的一种编码方法示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a coding method according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图13为本发明实施例提供的另一种编码方法示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of another encoding method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图14为本发明实施例提供的一种编码装置示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an encoding device according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图15为本发明实施例提供的另一种编码装置示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another encoding apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.
以下如果没有关于相同参考符号的具体注释,相同的参考符号是指相同或至少功能上等效的特征。If there is no specific note about the same reference symbols below, the same reference symbols refer to the same or at least functionally equivalent features.
具体实施方式detailed description
以下描述中,参考形成本公开一部分并以说明之方式示出本发明实施例的具体方面或可使用本发明实施例的具体方面的附图。应理解,本发明实施例可在其它方面中使用,并可包括附图中未描绘的结构或逻辑变化。因此,以下详细描述不应以限制性的意义来理解,且本发明的范围由所附权利要求书界定。In the following description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part of this disclosure and illustrate, by way of illustration, specific aspects of embodiments of the invention or which may be used. It should be understood that embodiments of the present invention may be used in other aspects and may include structural or logical changes not depicted in the drawings. Therefore, the following detailed description should not be interpreted in a limiting sense, and the scope of the invention is defined by the appended claims.
例如,应理解,结合所描述方法的揭示内容可以同样适用于用于执行所述方法的对应设备或系统,且反之亦然。例如,如果描述一个或多个具体方法步骤,则对应的设备可以包含如功能单元等一个或多个单元,来执行所描述的一个或多个方法步骤(例如,一个单元执行一个或多个步骤,或多个单元,其中每个都执行多个步骤中的一个或多个),即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个单元。另一方面,例如,如果基于如功能单元等一个或多个单元描述具体装置,则对应的方法可以包含一个步骤来执行一个或多个单元的功能性(例如,一个步骤执行一个或多个单元的功能性,或多个步骤,其中每个执行多个单元中一个或多个单元的功能性),即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个步骤。进一步,应理解的是,除非另外明确提出,本文中所描述的各示例性实施例和/或方面的特征可以相互组合。For example, it should be understood that the disclosure in connection with the described method may be equally applicable to a corresponding device or system for performing the method, and vice versa. For example, if one or more specific method steps are described, the corresponding device may include one or more units such as functional units to perform the described one or more method steps (e.g., one unit performs one or more steps Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of the multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. On the other hand, for example, if a specific device is described based on one or more units such as functional units, the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (e.g., a step performs one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, where each performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. Further, it should be understood that the features of the various exemplary embodiments and / or aspects described herein may be combined with each other, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
视频编码通常是指处理形成视频或视频序列的图片序列。在视频编码领域,术语“图片(picture)”、“帧(frame)”或“图像(image)”可以用作同义词。本申请(或本公开)中使用的视频编码表示视频编码或视频解码。视频编码在源侧执行,通常包括处理(例如,通过压缩)原始视频图片以减少表示该视频图片所需的数据量(从而更高效地存储和/或传输)。视频解码在目的地侧执行,通常包括相对于编码器作逆处理,以重构视频图片。实施例涉及的视频图片(或总称为图片,下文将进行解释)“编码”应理解为涉及视频序列的“编码”或“解码”。编码部分和解码部分的组合也称为编解码(编码和解码)。Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or a video sequence. In the field of video coding, the terms "picture", "frame" or "image" can be used as synonyms. Video encoding used in this application (or this disclosure) means video encoding or video decoding. Video encoding is performed on the source side and typically involves processing (e.g., by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture (thus storing and / or transmitting more efficiently). Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture. The video pictures (or collectively referred to as pictures, which will be explained below) referred to in the embodiments should be understood as "encoding" or "decoding" related to a video sequence. The combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
无损视频编码情况下,可以重构原始视频图片,即经重构视频图片具有与原始视频图片相同的质量(假设存储或传输期间没有传输损耗或其它数据丢失)。在有损视频编码情况下,通过例如量化执行进一步压缩,来减少表示视频图片所需的数据量,而解码器侧无法完全重构视频图片,即经重构视频图片的质量相比原始视频图片的质量较低或较差。In the case of lossless video coding, the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming there is no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission). In the case of lossy video coding, further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, and the decoder side cannot completely reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is compared to the original video picture The quality is lower or worse.
H.261的几个视频编码标准属于“有损混合型视频编解码”(即,将样本域中的空间和时间预测与变换域中用于应用量化的2D变换编码结合)。视频序列的每个图片通常分割成不重叠的块集合,通常在块层级上进行编码。换句话说,编码器侧通常在块(视频块)层级处理亦即编码视频,例如,通过空间(图片内)预测和时间(图片间)预测来产生预测块,从当前块(当前处理或待处理的块)减去预测块以获取残差块,在变换域变换残差块并量化残差块,以减少待传输(压缩)的数据量,而解码器侧将相对于编码器的逆处理部分应用于经编码或经压缩块,以重构用于表示的当前块。另外,编码器复制解码器处理循环,使得编码器和解码器生成相同的预测(例如帧内预测和帧间预测)和/或重构,用于处理亦即编码后续块。Several video coding standards for H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video codecs" (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain). Each picture of a video sequence is usually partitioned into a set of non-overlapping blocks, usually encoded at the block level. In other words, the encoder side usually processes at the block (video block) level, that is, encodes the video. For example, the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction. Processed blocks) minus the prediction block to obtain the residual block, transform the residual block in the transform domain and quantize the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will perform inverse processing relative to the encoder Partially applied to an encoded or compressed block to reconstruct the current block for representation. In addition, the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same predictions (such as intra prediction and inter prediction) and / or reconstruction for processing, that is, encoding subsequent blocks.
如本文中所用,术语“块”可以为图片或帧的一部分。为便于描述,参考多用途视频编码(VVC:Versatile Video Coding)或由ITU-T视频编码专家组(Video Coding Experts Group,VCEG)和ISO/IEC运动图像专家组(Motion Picture Experts Group,MPEG)的视频编码联合工作组(Joint Collaboration Team on Video Coding,JCT-VC)开发的高效视频编码(High-Efficiency Video Coding,HEVC)描述本发明实施例。本领域普通技术人员理解本发明实施例不限于HEVC或VVC。可以指CU、PU和TU。在HEVC中,通过使用表示为编码树的四叉树结构将CTU拆分为多个CU。在CU层级处作出是否使用图片间(时间)或图片内(空间)预测对图片区域进行编码的决策。每个CU可以根据PU拆分类型进一步拆分为一个、两个或四个PU。一个PU内应用相同的预测过程,并在PU基础上将相关信息传输到解码器。在通过基于PU拆分类型应用预测过程获取 残差块之后,可以根据类似于用于CU的编码树的其它四叉树结构将CU分割成变换单元(transform unit,TU)。在视频压缩技术最新的发展中,使用四叉树和二叉树(Quad-tree and binary tree,QTBT)分割帧来分割编码块。在QTBT块结构中,CU可以为正方形或矩形形状。在VVC中,编码树单元(coding tree unit,CTU)首先由四叉树结构分割。四叉树叶节点进一步由二进制树结构分割。二进制树叶节点称为编码单元(coding unit,CU),所述分段用于预测和变换处理,无需其它任何分割。这表示CU、PU和TU在QTBT编码块结构中的块大小相同。同时,还提出与QTBT块结构一起使用多重分割,例如三叉树分割。As used herein, the term "block" may be part of a picture or frame. For ease of description, reference is made to Multi-purpose Video Coding (VVC: Versatile Video Coding) or the ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group (VCEG) and ISO / IEC Motion Picture Experts Group (MPEG). The High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) developed by the Joint Working Group (Joint Collaboration, Video Coding, JCT-VC) describes embodiments of the present invention. Those skilled in the art understand that the embodiments of the present invention are not limited to HEVC or VVC. Can refer to CU, PU and TU. In HEVC, a CTU is split into multiple CUs by using a quad-tree structure represented as a coding tree. A decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode a picture region. Each CU can be further split into one, two or four PUs according to the PU split type. The same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU. After obtaining a residual block by applying a prediction process based on a PU split type, a CU may be partitioned into a transform unit (TU) according to other quad-tree structures similar to a coding tree for a CU. In the latest development of video compression technology, quad-tree and binary-tree (QTBT) split frames are used to split coded blocks. In the QTBT block structure, the CU may be a square or rectangular shape. In VVC, a coding tree unit (CTU) is first divided by a quad tree structure. The quad leaf nodes are further partitioned by a binary tree structure. Binary leaf nodes are called coding units (CUs), and the segments are used for prediction and transformation processing without any other segmentation. This means that the CU, PU, and TU have the same block size in the QTBT coded block structure. At the same time, it is also proposed to use multiple partitions with QTBT block structures, such as triple-tree partitioning.
以下基于图1至4描述编码器20、解码器30和编码解码系统10、40的实施例(在基于图12、13更详细描述本发明实施例之前)。Embodiments of the encoder 20, the decoder 30, and the encoding and decoding systems 10, 40 are described below based on Figs. 1 to 4 (before the embodiments of the present invention are described in more detail based on Figs. 12 and 13).
图1为绘示示例性编码系统10的概念性或示意性框图,例如,可以利用本申请(本公开)技术的视频编码系统10。视频编码系统10的编码器20(例如,视频编码器20)和解码器30(例如,视频解码器30)表示可用于根据本申请中描述的各种实例执行基于运动估计评估区域(Mot ion Est imat ion Region MER)的解码方法的技术的设备实例。如图1中所示,编码系统10包括源设备12,用于向例如解码经编码数据13的目的地设备14提供经编码数据13,例如,经编码图片13。FIG. 1 is a conceptual or schematic block diagram illustrating an exemplary encoding system 10. For example, a video encoding system 10 that can use the technology of the present application (the present disclosure). The encoder 20 (e.g., video encoder 20) and decoder 30 (e.g., video decoder 30) of the video encoding system 10 represent that they can be used to perform motion estimation based evaluation regions (MotionEst) based on various examples described in this application. Example of the technique of the decoding method of imation region. As shown in FIG. 1, the encoding system 10 includes a source device 12 for providing the encoded data 13, such as the encoded picture 13, to a destination device 14 that decodes the encoded data 13, for example.
源设备12包括编码器20,另外亦即可选地,可以包括图片源16,例如图片预处理单元18的预处理单元18,以及通信接口或通信单元22。The source device 12 includes an encoder 20, and in addition, optionally, may include a picture source 16, such as a pre-processing unit 18 of a picture pre-processing unit 18, and a communication interface or communication unit 22.
图片源16可以包括或可以为任何类别的图片捕获设备,用于例如捕获现实世界图片,和/或任何类别的图片或评论(对于屏幕内容编码,屏幕上的一些文字也认为是待编码的图片或图像的一部分)生成设备,例如,用于生成计算机动画图片的计算机图形处理器,或用于获取和/或提供现实世界图片、计算机动画图片(例如,屏幕内容、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)图片)的任何类别设备,和/或其任何组合(例如,实景(augmented reality,AR)图片)。The picture source 16 may include or may be any kind of picture capture device for, for example, capturing real-world pictures, and / or any kind of pictures or comments (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be a picture to be encoded Or a part of an image) generating device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animated pictures, or for obtaining and / or providing real world pictures, computer animated pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality (VR) ) Pictures) of any type of device, and / or any combination thereof (eg, augmented reality (AR) pictures).
(数字)图片为或者可以视为具有亮度值的采样点的二维阵列或矩阵。阵列中的采样点也可以称为像素(pixel)(像素(picture element)的简称)或像素(pel)。阵列或图片在水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上的采样点数目定义图片的尺寸和/或分辨率。为了表示颜色,通常采用三个颜色分量,即图片可以表示为或包含三个采样阵列。RBG格式或颜色空间中,图片包括对应的红色、绿色及蓝色采样阵列。但是,在视频编码中,每个像素通常以亮度/色度格式或颜色空间表示,例如,YCbCr,包括Y指示的亮度分量(有时也可以用L指示)以及Cb和Cr指示的两个色度分量。亮度(简写为luma)分量Y表示亮度或灰度水平强度(例如,在灰度等级图片中两者相同),而两个色度(简写为chroma)分量Cb和Cr表示色度或颜色信息分量。相应地,YCbCr格式的图片包括亮度采样值(Y)的亮度采样阵列,和色度值(Cb和Cr)的两个色度采样阵列。RGB格式的图片可以转换或变换为YCbCr格式,反之亦然,该过程也称为色彩变换或转换。如果图片是黑白的,该图片可以只包括亮度采样阵列。A (digital) picture is or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with luminance values. The sampling points in the array may also be called pixels (short for picture element) or pixels. The number of sampling points of the array or picture in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) defines the size and / or resolution of the picture. In order to represent color, three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented as or contain three sampling arrays. In RBG format or color space, pictures include corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays. However, in video coding, each pixel is usually represented in a luma / chroma format or color space, for example, YCbCr, including the luma component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two chroma indicated by Cb and Cr Weight. Luma (abbreviated as luma) component Y represents luminance or gray level intensity (for example, both are the same in a grayscale picture), while two chroma (abbreviated as chroma) components Cb and Cr represent chroma or color information components . Correspondingly, a picture in the YCbCr format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (Cb and Cr). Pictures in RGB format can be converted or converted to YCbCr format, and vice versa. This process is also called color conversion or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture can include only an array of luminance samples.
图片源16(例如,视频源16)可以为,例如用于捕获图片的相机,例如图片存储器的存储器,包括或存储先前捕获或产生的图片,和/或获取或接收图片的任何类别的(内部或外部)接口。相机可以为,例如,本地的或集成在源设备中的集成相机,存储器可为本地的或例如集成在源设备中的集成存储器。接口可以为,例如,从外部视频源接收图片的外部接口,外部视频源例如为外部图片捕获设备,比如相机、外部存储器或外部图片生成设备,外部图片生成设备例如为外部计算机图形处理器、计算机或服务器。接口可以为根据任何专有或标准化接口协议的任何类别的接口,例如有线或无线接口、光接口。获取图片数据17的接口可以是与通信接口22相同的接口或是通信接口22的一部分。The picture source 16 (e.g., the video source 16) may be, for example, a camera for capturing pictures, such as a memory of a picture memory, including or storing a previously captured or generated picture, and / or any category (internal Or external) interface. The camera may be, for example, an integrated camera that is local or integrated in the source device, and the memory may be local or, for example, an integrated memory that is integrated in the source device. The interface may be, for example, an external interface for receiving pictures from an external video source. The external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device. The external picture generation device is, for example, an external computer graphics processor, a computer. Or server. The interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface. The interface for acquiring the picture data 17 may be the same interface as the communication interface 22 or a part of the communication interface 22.
区别于预处理单元18和预处理单元18执行的处理,图片或图片数据17(例如,视频数据16)也可以称为原始图片或原始图片数据17。Different from the processing performed by the pre-processing unit 18 and the pre-processing unit 18, a picture or picture data 17 (for example, video data 16) may also be referred to as an original picture or original picture data 17.
预处理单元18用于接收(原始)图片数据17并对图片数据17执行预处理,以获取经预处理的图片19或经预处理的图片数据19。例如,预处理单元18执行的预处理可以包括整修、色彩格式转换(例如,从RGB转换为YCbCr)、调色或去噪。可以理解,预处理单元18可以是可选组件。The pre-processing unit 18 is configured to receive (original) picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the picture data 17 to obtain pre-processed pictures 19 or pre-processed picture data 19. For example, the pre-processing performed by the pre-processing unit 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (for example, conversion from RGB to YCbCr), color correction, or denoising. It is understood that the pre-processing unit 18 may be an optional component.
编码器20(例如,视频编码器20)用于接收经预处理的图片数据19并提供经编码图片数据21(下文将进一步描述细节,例如,基于图2或图4)。在一个实例中,编码器20可以用于……An encoder 20 (eg, video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19 and provide the encoded picture data 21 (details will be further described below, for example, based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4). In one example, the encoder 20 may be used for ...
源设备12的通信接口22可以用于接收经编码图片数据21并传输至其它设备,例如,目的地设备14或任何其它设备,以用于存储或直接重构,或用于在对应地存储经编码数据13和/或传输经编码数据13至其它设备之前处理经编码图片数据21,其它设备例如为目的地设备14或任何其它用于解码或存储的设备。The communication interface 22 of the source device 12 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and transmit it to other devices, such as the destination device 14 or any other device, for storage or direct reconstruction, or for correspondingly storing the The encoded data 13 and / or the encoded picture data 21 are processed before transmitting the encoded data 13 to other devices, such as the destination device 14 or any other device for decoding or storage.
目的地设备14包括解码器30(例如,视频解码器30),另外亦即可选地,可以包括通信接口或通信单元28、后处理单元32和显示设备34。The destination device 14 includes a decoder 30 (for example, a video decoder 30), and in addition, optionally, it may include a communication interface or communication unit 28, a post-processing unit 32, and a display device 34.
目的地设备14的通信接口28用于例如,直接从源设备12或任何其它源接收经编码图片数据21或经编码数据13,任何其它源例如为存储设备,存储设备例如为经编码图片数据存储设备。The communication interface 28 of the destination device 14 is used, for example, to receive the encoded picture data 21 or the encoded data 13 directly from the source device 12 or any other source. Any other source is, for example, a storage device, and the storage device is, for example, encoded picture data storage. device.
通信接口22和通信接口28可以用于藉由源设备12和目的地设备14之间的直接通信链路或藉由任何类别的网络传输或接收经编码图片数据21或经编码数据13,直接通信链路例如为直接有线或无线连接, 任何类别的网络例如为有线或无线网络或其任何组合,或任何类别的私网和公网,或其任何组合。The communication interface 22 and the communication interface 28 can be used for direct communication through a direct communication link between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or transmission or reception of encoded picture data 21 or encoded data 13 through any type of network The link is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection, and any type of network is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or any type of private and public network, or any combination thereof.
通信接口22可以例如用于将经编码图片数据21封装成合适的格式,例如包,以在通信链路或通信网络上传输。The communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a packet, for transmission over a communication link or communication network.
形成通信接口22的对应部分的通信接口28可以例如用于解封装经编码数据13,以获取经编码图片数据21。The communication interface 28 forming a corresponding part of the communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the encoded data 13 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
通信接口22和通信接口28都可以配置为单向通信接口,如图1中用于经编码图片数据13的从源设备12指向目的地设备14的箭头所指示,或配置为双向通信接口,以及可以用于例如发送和接收消息来建立连接、确认和交换任何其它与通信链路和/或例如经编码图片数据传输的数据传输有关的信息。Both the communication interface 22 and the communication interface 28 may be configured as unidirectional communication interfaces, as indicated by the arrows for the encoded picture data 13 from the source device 12 to the destination device 14 in FIG. 1, or configured as bidirectional communication interfaces, and It can be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, acknowledge, and exchange any other information related to a communication link and / or data transmission such as encoded picture data transmission.
解码器30用于接收经编码图片数据21并提供经解码图片数据31或经解码图片31(下文将进一步描述细节,例如,基于图3或图5)。The decoder 30 is configured to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (details will be further described below, for example, based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 5).
目的地设备14的后处理器32用于后处理经解码图片数据31(也称为经重构图片数据),例如,经解码图片131,以获取经后处理图片数据33,例如,经后处理图片33。后处理单元32执行的后处理可以包括,例如,色彩格式转换(例如,从YCbCr转换为RGB)、调色、整修或重采样,或任何其它处理,用于例如准备经解码图片数据31以由显示设备34显示。The post-processor 32 of the destination device 14 is used to post-process decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data), for example, decoded picture 131 to obtain post-processed picture data 33, for example, post-processed Picture 33. The post-processing performed by the post-processing unit 32 may include, for example, color format conversion (e.g., conversion from YCbCr to RGB), color correction, retouching, or resampling, or any other processing, such as preparing the decoded picture data 31 to be processed by The display device 34 displays it.
目的地设备14的显示设备34用于接收经后处理图片数据33以向例如用户或观看者显示图片。显示设备34可以为或可以包括任何类别的用于呈现经重构图片的显示器,例如,集成的或外部的显示器或监视器。例如,显示器可以包括液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(organic light emitting diode,OLED)显示器、等离子显示器、投影仪、微LED显示器、硅基液晶(liquid crystal on silicon,LCoS)、数字光处理器(digital light processor,DLP)或任何类别的其它显示器。The display device 34 of the destination device 14 is used to receive the post-processed picture data 33 to display a picture to, for example, a user or a viewer. The display device 34 may be or may include any kind of display for presenting a reconstructed picture, such as an integrated or external display or monitor. For example, the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), Digital light processor (DLP) or any other display of any kind.
虽然图1将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备,但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性,即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中,可以使用相同硬件和/或软件,或使用单独的硬件和/或软件,或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。Although FIG. 1 illustrates the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices, the device embodiment may also include the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or corresponding And the functionality of the destination device 14 or equivalent. In such embodiments, the same hardware and / or software, or separate hardware and / or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
本领域技术人员基于描述明显可知,不同单元的功能性或图1所示的源设备12和/或目的地设备14的功能性的存在和(准确)划分可能根据实际设备和应用有所不同。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand based on the description that the existence and (exact) division of the functionality of different units or the functionality of the source device 12 and / or the destination device 14 shown in FIG. 1 may differ according to the actual device and application.
编码器20(例如,视频编码器20)和解码器30(例如,视频解码器30)都可以实施为各种合适电路中的任一个,例如,一个或多个微处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、离散逻辑、硬件或其任何组合。如果部分地以软件实施所述技术,则设备可将软件的指令存储于合适的非暂时性计算机可读存储介质中,且可使用一或多个处理器以硬件执行指令从而执行本公开的技术。前述内容(包含硬件、软件、硬件与软件的组合等)中的任一者可视为一或多个处理器。视频编码器20和视频解码器30中的每一个可以包含在一或多个编码器或解码器中,所述编码器或解码器中的任一个可以集成为对应设备中的组合编码器/解码器(编解码器)的一部分。Both the encoder 20 (e.g., video encoder 20) and decoder 30 (e.g., video decoder 30) may be implemented as any of a variety of suitable circuits, such as one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof. If the technology is implemented partially in software, the device may store the software's instructions in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the techniques of the present disclosure. . Any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) can be considered as one or more processors. Each of the video encoder 20 and the video decoder 30 may be included in one or more encoders or decoders, and any of the encoders or decoders may be integrated as a combined encoder / decoder in a corresponding device (Codec).
源设备12可称为视频编码设备或视频编码装置。目的地设备14可称为视频解码设备或视频解码装置。源设备12以及目的地设备14可以是视频编码设备或视频编码装置的实例。The source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device or a video encoding device. The destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device or a video decoding device. The source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be examples of a video encoding device or a video encoding apparatus.
源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种设备中的任一个,包含任何类别的手持或静止设备,例如,笔记本或膝上型计算机、移动电话、智能电话、平板或平板计算机、摄像机、台式计算机、机顶盒、电视、显示设备、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、视频流式传输设备(例如内容服务服务器或内容分发服务器)、广播接收器设备、广播发射器设备等,并可以不使用或使用任何类别的操作系统。 Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary device, such as a notebook or laptop computer, mobile phone, smartphone, tablet or tablet computer, video camera, desktop Computer, set-top box, TV, display device, digital media player, video game console, video streaming device (such as content service server or content distribution server), broadcast receiver device, broadcast transmitter device, etc., and may not be used Or use any kind of operating system.
在一些情况下,源设备12和目的地设备14可以经装备以用于无线通信。因此,源设备12和目的地设备14可以为无线通信设备。In some cases, source device 12 and destination device 14 may be equipped for wireless communication. Therefore, the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be wireless communication devices.
在一些情况下,图1中所示视频编码系统10仅为示例,本申请的技术可以适用于不必包含编码和解码设备之间的任何数据通信的视频编码设置(例如,视频编码或视频解码)。在其它实例中,数据可从本地存储器检索、在网络上流式传输等。视频编码设备可以对数据进行编码并且将数据存储到存储器,和/或视频解码设备可以从存储器检索数据并且对数据进行解码。在一些实例中,由并不彼此通信而是仅编码数据到存储器和/或从存储器检索数据且解码数据的设备执行编码和解码。In some cases, the video encoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1 is merely an example, and the techniques of the present application may be applicable to a video encoding setting (eg, video encoding or video decoding) that does not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices. . In other examples, data may be retrieved from local storage, streamed over a network, and the like. The video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to a memory, and / or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data. In some examples, encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other, but only encode data to and / or retrieve data from memory and decode data.
应理解,对于以上参考视频编码器20所描述的实例中的每一个,视频解码器30可以用于执行相反过程。关于信令语法元素,视频解码器30可以用于接收并解析这种语法元素,相应地解码相关视频数据。在一些例子中,视频编码器20可以将一个或多个定义……的语法元素熵编码成经编码视频比特流。在此类实例中,视频解码器30可以解析这种语法元素,并相应地解码相关视频数据。It should be understood that for each of the examples described above with reference to video encoder 20, video decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process. Regarding signaling syntax elements, video decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements, and decode related video data accordingly. In some examples, video encoder 20 may entropy encode one or more syntax elements that define ... into an encoded video bitstream. In such examples, video decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode related video data accordingly.
编码器&编码方法Encoder & encoding method
图2示出用于实现本申请(公开)技术的视频编码器20的实例的示意性/概念性框图。在图2的实例中,视频编码器20包括残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器单元220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer, DPB)230、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270。预测处理单元260可以包含帧间预测单元244、帧内预测单元254和模式选择单元262。帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计单元和运动补偿单元(未图示)。图2所示的视频编码器20也可以称为混合型视频编码器或根据混合型视频编解码器的视频编码器。FIG. 2 shows a schematic / conceptual block diagram of an example of a video encoder 20 for implementing the technology of the present (disclosed) application. In the example of FIG. 2, the video encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transformation processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transformation processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, and a loop filter. A decoder unit 220, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, a prediction processing unit 260, and an entropy encoding unit 270. The prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262. The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown). The video encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder according to a hybrid video codec.
例如,残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270形成编码器20的前向信号路径,而例如逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230、预测处理单元260形成编码器的后向信号路径,其中编码器的后向信号路径对应于解码器的信号路径(参见图3中的解码器30)。For example, the residual calculation unit 204, the transformation processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy coding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while the The constructing unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form a backward signal path of the encoder, wherein the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to To the decoder's signal path (see decoder 30 in Figure 3).
编码器20通过例如输入202,接收图片201或图片201的块203,例如,形成视频或视频序列的图片序列中的图片。图片块203也可以称为当前图片块或待编码图片块,图片201可以称为当前图片或待编码图片(尤其是在视频编码中将当前图片与其它图片区分开时,其它图片例如同一视频序列亦即也包括当前图片的视频序列中的先前经编码和/或经解码图片)。The encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or a block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, a picture in a picture sequence forming a video or a video sequence. The picture block 203 can also be called the current picture block or the picture block to be encoded, and the picture 201 can be called the current picture or the picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, other pictures such as the same video sequence (Ie previously encoded and / or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture).
分割segmentation
编码器20的实施例可以包括分割单元(图2中未绘示),用于将图片201分割成多个例如块203的块,通常分割成多个不重叠的块。分割单元可以用于对视频序列中所有图片使用相同的块大小以及定义块大小的对应栅格,或用于在图片或子集或图片群组之间更改块大小,并将每个图片分割成对应的块。An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a segmentation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for segmenting the picture 201 into multiple blocks, such as the block 203, and generally into multiple non-overlapping blocks. The segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size and corresponding raster to define the block size for all pictures in the video sequence, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or groups of pictures, and split each picture into Corresponding block.
在一个实例中,视频编码器20的预测处理单元260可以用于执行上述分割技术的任何组合。In one example, the prediction processing unit 260 of the video encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the aforementioned segmentation techniques.
如图片201,块203也是或可以视为具有亮度值(采样值)的采样点的二维阵列或矩阵,虽然其尺寸比图片201小。换句话说,块203可以包括,例如,一个采样阵列(例如黑白图片201情况下的亮度阵列)或三个采样阵列(例如,彩色图片情况下的一个亮度阵列和两个色度阵列)或依据所应用的色彩格式的任何其它数目和/或类别的阵列。块203的水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上采样点的数目定义块203的尺寸。Like picture 201, block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with brightness values (sampling values), although its size is smaller than picture 201. In other words, the block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (e.g., a luminance array in the case of a black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (e.g., one luminance array and two chroma arrays in the case of a color picture) or a basis An array of any other number and / or category of color formats applied. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the block 203 defines the size of the block 203.
如图2所示的编码器20用于逐块编码图片201,例如,对每个块203执行编码和预测。The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode a picture 201 block by block, for example, performing encoding and prediction on each block 203.
残差计算Residual calculation
残差计算单元204用于基于图片块203和预测块265(下文提供预测块265的其它细节)计算残差块205,例如,通过逐样本(逐像素)将图片块203的样本值减去预测块265的样本值,以在样本域中获取残差块205。The residual calculation unit 204 is configured to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture block 203 and the prediction block 265 (the other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below). Sample values of block 265 to obtain residual block 205 in the sample domain.
变换Transform
变换处理单元206用于在残差块205的样本值上应用例如离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)或离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform,DST)的变换,以在变换域中获取变换系数207。变换系数207也可以称为变换残差系数,并在变换域中表示残差块205。The transform processing unit 206 is configured to apply a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain. . The transform coefficient 207 may also be referred to as a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in a transform domain.
变换处理单元206可以用于应用DCT/DST的整数近似值,例如为HEVC/H.265指定的变换。与正交DCT变换相比,这种整数近似值通常由某一因子按比例缩放。为了维持经正变换和逆变换处理的残差块的范数,应用额外比例缩放因子作为变换过程的一部分。比例缩放因子通常是基于某些约束条件选择的,例如,比例缩放因子是用于移位运算的2的幂、变换系数的位深度、准确性和实施成本之间的权衡等。例如,在解码器30侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为逆变换(以及在编码器20侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为对应逆变换)指定具体比例缩放因子,以及相应地,可以在编码器20侧通过变换处理单元206为正变换指定对应比例缩放因子。The transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply an integer approximation of DCT / DST, such as the transform specified for HEVC / H.265. Compared to an orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. To maintain the norm of the residual blocks processed by the forward and inverse transforms, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process. The scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints, for example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for shift operations, the bit depth of the transform coefficients, the trade-off between accuracy, and implementation cost. For example, a specific scaling factor is specified on the decoder 30 side by, for example, the inverse transform processing unit 212 (and on the encoder 20 side by, for example, the inverse transform processing unit 212 as the corresponding inverse transform), and accordingly, the The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transformation through the transformation processing unit 206.
量化Quantify
量化单元208用于例如通过应用标量量化或向量量化来量化变换系数207,以获取经量化变换系数209。经量化变换系数209也可以称为经量化残差系数209。量化过程可以减少与部分或全部变换系数207有关的位深度。例如,可在量化期间将n位变换系数向下舍入到m位变换系数,其中n大于m。可通过调整量化参数(quantization parameter,QP)修改量化程度。例如,对于标量量化,可以应用不同的标度来实现较细或较粗的量化。较小量化步长对应较细量化,而较大量化步长对应较粗量化。可以通过量化参数(quantization parameter,QP)指示合适的量化步长。例如,量化参数可以为合适的量化步长的预定义集合的索引。例如,较小的量化参数可以对应精细量化(较小量化步长),较大量化参数可以对应粗糙量化(较大量化步长),反之亦然。量化可以包含除以量化步长以及例如通过逆量化210执行的对应的量化或逆量化,或者可以包含乘以量化步长。根据例如HEVC的一些标准的实施例可以使用量化参数来确定量化步长。一般而言,可以基于量化参数使用包含除法的等式的定点近似来计算量化步长。可以引入额外比例缩放因子来进行量化和反量化,以恢复可能由于在用于量化步长和量化参数的等式的定点近似中使用的标度而修改的残差块的范数。在一个实例实施方式中,可以合并逆变换和反量化的标度。或者,可以使用自定义量化表并在例如比特流中将其从编码器通过信号发送到解码器。量化是有损操作,其中量化步长越大,损耗越大。The quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficients 207, for example, by applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficients 209. The quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209. The quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients may be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m. The degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP). For scalar quantization, for example, different scales can be applied to achieve finer or coarser quantization. A smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization, while a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization. An appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by a quantization parameter (QP). For example, the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps. For example, smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size), larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size), and vice versa. Quantization may include division by a quantization step size and corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed, for example, by inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplication by a quantization step size. Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size. In general, the quantization step size can be calculated using a fixed-point approximation using an equation containing division based on the quantization parameter. Additional scaling factors may be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equation for the quantization step size and quantization parameter. In one example embodiment, inverse transform and inverse quantization scales can be combined. Alternatively, a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in, for example, a bitstream. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
逆量化单元210用于在经量化系数上应用量化单元208的逆量化,以获取经反量化系数211,例如,基于或使用与量化单元208相同的量化步长,应用量化单元208应用的量化方案的逆量化方案。经反量化系数211也可以称为经反量化残差系数211,对应于变换系数207,虽然由于量化造成的损耗通常与变换 系数不相同。The inverse quantization unit 210 is configured to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantized coefficients 211. For example, based on or using the same quantization step as the quantization unit 208, the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 is applied. Inverse quantization scheme. The inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as the inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually different from the transform coefficient.
逆变换处理单元212用于应用变换处理单元206应用的变换的逆变换,例如,逆离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)或逆离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform,DST),以在样本域中获取逆变换块213。逆变换块213也可以称为逆变换经反量化块213或逆变换残差块213。The inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply an inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, an inverse discrete cosine transform (DCT) or an inverse discrete sine transform (DST), in the sample domain. Obtain an inverse transform block 213. The inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform inverse quantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.
重构单元214(例如,求和器214)用于将逆变换块213(即经重构残差块213)添加至预测块265,以在样本域中获取经重构块215,例如,将经重构残差块213的样本值与预测块265的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 214 (for example, the summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (that is, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain. For example, The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 265.
可选地,例如线缓冲器216的缓冲器单元216(或简称“缓冲器”216)用于缓冲或存储经重构块215和对应的样本值,用于例如帧内预测。在其它的实施例中,编码器可以用于使用存储在缓冲器单元216中的未经滤波的经重构块和/或对应的样本值来进行任何类别的估计和/或预测,例如帧内预测。Optionally, a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values, for example, for intra prediction. In other embodiments, the encoder may be used to use any unfiltered reconstructed block and / or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any category of estimation and / or prediction, such as intra-frame prediction.
例如,编码器20的实施例可以经配置以使得缓冲器单元216不只用于存储用于帧内预测254的经重构块215,也用于环路滤波器单元220(在图2中未示出),和/或,例如使得缓冲器单元216和经解码图片缓冲器单元230形成一个缓冲器。其它实施例可以用于将经滤波块221和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的块或样本(图2中均未示出)用作帧内预测254的输入或基础。For example, an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only for storing the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2). Out), and / or, for example, to make the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 form a buffer. Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and / or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as the input or basis for the intra prediction 254.
环路滤波器单元220(或简称“环路滤波器”220)用于对经重构块215进行滤波以获取经滤波块221,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。环路滤波器单元220旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset,SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器,例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter,ALF),或锐化或平滑滤波器,或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元220在图2中示出为环内滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元220可实施为环后滤波器。经滤波块221也可以称为经滤波的经重构块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以在环路滤波器单元220对经重构编码块执行滤波操作之后存储经重构编码块。The loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter" 220) is configured to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. The loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or other filters, such as a bilateral filter, Adaptive loop filters (adaptive loop filters, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filters, or cooperative filters. Although the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter. The filtered block 221 may also be referred to as a filtered reconstructed block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoded block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoded block.
编码器20(对应地,环路滤波器单元220)的实施例可以用于输出环路滤波器参数(例如,样本自适应偏移信息),例如,直接输出或由熵编码单元270或任何其它熵编码单元熵编码后输出,例如使得解码器30可以接收并应用相同的环路滤波器参数用于解码。An embodiment of the encoder 20 (correspondingly, the loop filter unit 220) may be used to output loop filter parameters (e.g., sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy coding unit 270 or any other The entropy coding unit outputs after entropy coding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230可以为存储参考图片数据供视频编码器20编码视频数据之用的参考图片存储器。DPB 230可由多种存储器设备中的任一个形成,例如动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)(包含同步DRAM(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、磁阻式RAM(magnetoresistive RAM,MRAM)、电阻式RAM(resistive RAM,RRAM))或其它类型的存储器设备。可以由同一存储器设备或单独的存储器设备提供DPB 230和缓冲器216。在某一实例中,经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230用于存储经滤波块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以进一步用于存储同一当前图片或例如先前经重构图片的不同图片的其它先前的经滤波块,例如先前经重构和经滤波块221,以及可以提供完整的先前经重构亦即经解码图片(和对应参考块和样本)和/或部分经重构当前图片(和对应参考块和样本),例如用于帧间预测。在某一实例中,如果经重构块215无需环内滤波而得以重构,则经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230用于存储经重构块215。The decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for the video encoder 20 to encode video data. DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access (DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), and resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)) or other types of memory devices. The DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices. In a certain example, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the filtered block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previously reconstructed pictures, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide a complete previous Reconstruction is the decoded picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and / or part of the reconstructed current picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example for inter prediction. In a certain example, if the reconstructed block 215 is reconstructed without in-loop filtering, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
预测处理单元260,也称为块预测处理单元260,用于接收或获取块203(当前图片201的当前块203)和经重构图片数据,例如来自缓冲器216的同一(当前)图片的参考样本和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的一个或多个先前经解码图片的参考图片数据231,以及用于处理这类数据进行预测,即提供可以为经帧间预测块245或经帧内预测块255的预测块265。 Prediction processing unit 260, also referred to as block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or obtain block 203 (current block 203 of current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as a reference to the same (current) picture from buffer 216 Samples and / or reference picture data 231 from one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, i.e., may be provided as inter-predicted blocks 245 or intra- Prediction block 265 of prediction block 255.
模式选择单元262可以用于选择预测模式(例如帧内或帧间预测模式)和/或对应的用作预测块265的预测块245或255,以计算残差块205和重构经重构块215。The mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (such as an intra or inter prediction mode) and / or a corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
模式选择单元262的实施例可以用于选择预测模式(例如,从预测处理单元260所支持的那些预测模式中选择),所述预测模式提供最佳匹配或者说最小残差(最小残差意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩),或提供最小信令开销(最小信令开销意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩),或同时考虑或平衡以上两者。模式选择单元262可以用于基于码率失真优化(rate distortion optimization,RDO)确定预测模式,即选择提供最小码率失真优化的预测模式,或选择相关码率失真至少满足预测模式选择标准的预测模式。An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (e.g., selected from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260) that provides the best match or minimum residual (minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimal signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both. The mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO), that is, to select a prediction mode that provides the minimum code rate distortion optimization, or to select a prediction mode whose related code rate distortion meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
下文将详细解释编码器20的实例(例如,通过预测处理单元260)执行的预测处理和(例如,通过模式选择单元262)执行的模式选择。The prediction processing performed by an example of the encoder 20 (for example, by the prediction processing unit 260) and mode selection (for example, by the mode selection unit 262) will be explained in detail below.
如上文所述,编码器20用于从(预先确定的)预测模式集合中确定或选择最好或最优的预测模式。预测模式集合可以包括例如帧内预测模式和/或帧间预测模式。As described above, the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from a set of (predetermined) prediction modes. The prediction mode set may include, for example, an intra prediction mode and / or an inter prediction mode.
帧内预测模式集合可以包括35种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如H.265中定义的方向性模式,或者可以包括67种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如正在发展中的H.266中定义的方向性模式。The set of intra prediction modes may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or average) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, such as non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
(可能的)帧间预测模式集合取决于可用参考图片(即,例如前述存储在DBP 230中的至少部分经解码图片)和其它帧间预测参数,例如取决于是否使用整个参考图片或只使用参考图片的一部分,例如围绕当前块的区域的搜索窗区域,来搜索最佳匹配参考块,和/或例如取决于是否应用如半像素和/或四分之一 像素内插的像素内插。The set of (possible) inter-prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (i.e., at least part of the decoded pictures previously stored in DBP 230) and other inter-prediction parameters, such as whether to use the entire reference picture or only the reference A part of the picture, such as a search window area surrounding the area of the current block, searches for the best matching reference block, and / or depends on, for example, whether pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and / or quarter-pixel interpolation is applied.
除了以上预测模式,也可以应用跳过模式和/或直接模式。In addition to the above prediction modes, a skip mode and / or a direct mode can also be applied.
预测处理单元260可以进一步用于将块203分割成较小的块分区或子块,例如,通过迭代使用四叉树(quad-tree,QT)分割、二叉树(binary-tree,BT)分割或三叉树(triple-tree or ternary-tree,TT)分割,或其任何组合,以及用于例如为块分区或子块中的每一个执行预测,其中模式选择包括选择分割的块203的树结构和选择应用于块分区或子块中的每一个的预测模式。The prediction processing unit 260 may be further configured to divide the block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, using a quad-tree (QT) partition, a binary-tree (BT) partition, or a triple fork by iteration. Tree-triple-ternary-tree (TT) segmentation, or any combination thereof, and for performing predictions, for example, for each of block partitions or sub-blocks, where mode selection includes the tree structure and selection of the partitioned block 203 A prediction mode applied to each of a block partition or a sub-block.
帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计(motion estimation,ME)单元(图2中未示出)和运动补偿(motion compensation,MC)单元(图2中未示出)。运动估计单元用于接收或获取图片块203(当前图片201的当前图片块203)和经解码图片231,或至少一个或多个先前经重构块,例如,一个或多个其它/不同先前经解码图片231的经重构块,来进行运动估计。例如,视频序列可以包括当前图片和先前经解码图片31,或换句话说,当前图片和先前经解码图片31可以是形成视频序列的图片序列的一部分,或者形成该图片序列。The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC) unit (not shown in FIG. 2). The motion estimation unit is configured to receive or obtain picture block 203 (current picture block 203 of current picture 201) and decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other / different previous The reconstructed block of picture 231 is decoded for motion estimation. For example, the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence or form the picture sequence.
例如,编码器20可以用于从多个其它图片中的同一或不同图片的多个参考块中选择参考块,并向运动估计单元(图2中未示出)提供参考图片(或参考图片索引)和/或提供参考块的位置(X、Y坐标)与当前块的位置之间的偏移(空间偏移)作为帧间预测参数。该偏移也称为运动向量(motion vector,MV)。For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture (or reference picture index) to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2). ) And / or provide an offset (spatial offset) between the position (X, Y coordinates) of the reference block and the position of the current block as an inter prediction parameter. This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
运动补偿单元用于获取,例如接收帧间预测参数,并基于或使用帧间预测参数执行帧间预测来获取帧间预测块245。由运动补偿单元(图2中未示出)执行的运动补偿可以包含基于通过运动估计(可能执行对子像素精确度的内插)确定的运动/块向量取出或生成预测块。内插滤波可从已知像素样本产生额外像素样本,从而潜在地增加可用于编码图片块的候选预测块的数目。一旦接收到用于当前图片块的PU的运动向量,运动补偿单元246可以在一个参考图片列表中定位运动向量指向的预测块。运动补偿单元246还可以生成与块和视频条带相关联的语法元素,以供视频解码器30在解码视频条带的图片块时使用。The motion compensation unit is used for obtaining, for example, receiving inter prediction parameters, and performing inter prediction based on or using the inter prediction parameters to obtain the inter prediction block 245. Motion compensation performed by a motion compensation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) may include taking out or generating a prediction block based on a motion / block vector determined through motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation on sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks. Upon receiving the motion vector of the PU for the current picture block, the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list. Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by video decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.
帧内预测单元254用于获取,例如接收同一图片的图片块203(当前图片块)和一个或多个先前经重构块,例如经重构相邻块,以进行帧内估计。例如,编码器20可以用于从多个(预定)帧内预测模式中选择帧内预测模式。The intra prediction unit 254 is configured to obtain, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, that receive the same picture for intra estimation. For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
编码器20的实施例可以用于基于优化标准选择帧内预测模式,例如基于最小残差(例如,提供最类似于当前图片块203的预测块255的帧内预测模式)或最小码率失真。Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra-prediction mode based on an optimization criterion, such as based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra-prediction mode that provides a prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or a minimum code rate distortion.
帧内预测单元254进一步用于基于如所选择的帧内预测模式的帧内预测参数确定帧内预测块255。在任何情况下,在选择用于块的帧内预测模式之后,帧内预测单元254还用于向熵编码单元270提供帧内预测参数,即提供指示所选择的用于块的帧内预测模式的信息。在一个实例中,帧内预测单元254可以用于执行下文描述的帧内预测技术的任意组合。The intra prediction unit 254 is further configured to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra prediction mode for the block, the intra prediction unit 254 is further configured to provide the intra prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra prediction mode for the block. Information. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques described below.
熵编码单元270用于将熵编码算法或方案(例如,可变长度编码(variable length coding,VLC)方案、上下文自适应VLC(context adaptive VLC,CAVLC)方案、算术编码方案、上下文自适应二进制算术编码(context adaptive binary arithmetic coding,CABAC)、基于语法的上下文自适应二进制算术编码(syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding,SBAC)、概率区间分割熵(probability interval partitioning entropy,PIPE)编码或其它熵编码方法或技术)应用于经量化残差系数209、帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或环路滤波器参数中的单个或所有上(或不应用),以获取可以通过输出272以例如经编码比特流21的形式输出的经编码图片数据21。可以将经编码比特流传输到视频解码器30,或将其存档稍后由视频解码器30传输或检索。熵编码单元270还可用于熵编码正被编码的当前视频条带的其它语法元素。The entropy coding unit 270 is configured to apply an entropy coding algorithm or scheme (for example, a variable length coding (VLC) scheme, a context adaptive VLC (context adaptive VLC, CAVLC) scheme, an arithmetic coding scheme, and a context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding (context, adaptive binary coding, CABAC), syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC), probability interval partitioning entropy (PIPE) coding, or other entropy Encoding method or technique) applied to one or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and / or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain The encoded picture data 21 is output in the form of, for example, an encoded bit stream 21. The encoded bitstream may be transmitted to video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by video decoder 30. The entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice that is being encoded.
视频编码器20的其它结构变型可用于编码视频流。例如,基于非变换的编码器20可以在没有针对某些块或帧的变换处理单元206的情况下直接量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中,编码器20可具有组合成单个单元的量化单元208和逆量化单元210。Other structural variations of video encoder 20 may be used to encode a video stream. For example, the non-transform-based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without a transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
图3示出示例性视频解码器30,用于实现本申请的技术。视频解码器30用于接收例如由编码器20编码的经编码图片数据(例如,经编码比特流)21,以获取经解码图片231。在解码过程期间,视频解码器30从视频编码器20接收视频数据,例如表示经编码视频条带的图片块的经编码视频比特流及相关联的语法元素。FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary video decoder 30 for implementing the techniques of the present application. The video decoder 30 is configured to receive, for example, encoded picture data (eg, an encoded bit stream) 21 encoded by the encoder 20 to obtain a decoded picture 231. During the decoding process, video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of encoded video slices.
在图3的实例中,解码器30包括熵解码单元304、逆量化单元310、逆变换处理单元312、重构单元314(例如求和器314)、缓冲器316、环路滤波器320、经解码图片缓冲器330以及预测处理单元360。预测处理单元360可以包含帧间预测单元344、帧内预测单元354和模式选择单元362。在一些实例中,视频解码器30可执行大体上与参照图2的视频编码器20描述的编码遍次互逆的解码遍次。In the example of FIG. 3, the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360. The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362. In some examples, video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is substantially inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
熵解码单元304用于对经编码图片数据21执行熵解码,以获取例如经量化系数309和/或经解码的编码参数(图3中未示出),例如,帧间预测、帧内预测参数、环路滤波器参数和/或其它语法元素中(经解码)的任意一个或全部。熵解码单元304进一步用于将帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或其它语法元素转发至预测处理单元360。视频解码器30可接收视频条带层级和/或视频块层级的语法元素。The entropy decoding unit 304 is configured to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and / or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , (Filtered) any or all of the loop filter parameters and / or other syntax elements. The entropy decoding unit 304 is further configured to forward the inter prediction parameters, the intra prediction parameters, and / or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360. Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and / or the video block level.
逆量化单元310功能上可与逆量化单元110相同,逆变换处理单元312功能上可与逆变换处理单元212 相同,重构单元314功能上可与重构单元214相同,缓冲器316功能上可与缓冲器216相同,环路滤波器320功能上可与环路滤波器220相同,经解码图片缓冲器330功能上可与经解码图片缓冲器230相同。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110, the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally identical to the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214, and the buffer 316 may be functionally Like the buffer 216, the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220, and the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
预测处理单元360可以包括帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354,其中帧间预测单元344功能上可以类似于帧间预测单元244,帧内预测单元354功能上可以类似于帧内预测单元254。预测处理单元360通常用于执行块预测和/或从经编码数据21获取预测块365,以及从例如熵解码单元304(显式地或隐式地)接收或获取预测相关参数和/或关于所选择的预测模式的信息。The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354. The inter prediction unit 344 may be functionally similar to the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 354 may be functionally similar to the intra prediction unit 254. . The prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and / or obtain a prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and to receive or obtain prediction-related parameters from, for example, an entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly) and / or Information about the selected prediction mode.
当视频条带经编码为经帧内编码(I)条带时,预测处理单元360的帧内预测单元354用于基于信号表示的帧内预测模式及来自当前帧或图片的先前经解码块的数据来产生用于当前视频条带的图片块的预测块365。当视频帧经编码为经帧间编码(即B或P)条带时,预测处理单元360的帧间预测单元344(例如,运动补偿单元)用于基于运动向量及从熵解码单元304接收的其它语法元素生成用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测块365。对于帧间预测,可从一个参考图片列表内的一个参考图片中产生预测块。视频解码器30可基于存储于DPB 330中的参考图片,使用默认建构技术来建构参考帧列表:列表0和列表1。When a video slice is encoded as an intra-coded (I) slice, the intra-prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the intra-prediction mode based on the signal representation and the previously decoded block from the current frame or picture Data to generate a prediction block 365 for a picture block of the current video slice. When a video frame is encoded as an inter-encoded (ie, B or P) slice, the inter-prediction unit 344 (e.g., a motion compensation unit) of the prediction processing unit 360 is used to base the motion vector and receive the The other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for a video block of the current video slice. For inter prediction, a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list. The video decoder 30 may construct a reference frame list using a default construction technique based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330: List 0 and List 1.
预测处理单元360用于通过解析运动向量和其它语法元素,确定用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测信息,并使用预测信息产生用于正经解码的当前视频块的预测块。例如,预测处理单元360使用接收到的一些语法元素确定用于编码视频条带的视频块的预测模式(例如,帧内或帧间预测)、帧间预测条带类型(例如,B条带、P条带或GPB条带)、用于条带的参考图片列表中的一个或多个的建构信息、用于条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的运动向量、条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的帧间预测状态以及其它信息,以解码当前视频条带的视频块。The prediction processing unit 360 is configured to determine prediction information for a video block of a current video slice by analyzing a motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate a prediction block for a current video block that is being decoded. For example, the prediction processing unit 360 uses some of the received syntax elements to determine a prediction mode (e.g., intra or inter prediction) of a video block used to encode a video slice, an inter prediction slice type (e.g., B slice, P slice or GPB slice), construction information for one or more of the reference picture lists for the slice, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for the slice, each warp for the slice The inter-prediction status and other information of the inter-coded video block to decode the video block of the current video slice.
逆量化单元310可用于逆量化(即,反量化)在比特流中提供且由熵解码单元304解码的经量化变换系数。逆量化过程可包含使用由视频编码器20针对视频条带中的每一视频块所计算的量化参数来确定应该应用的量化程度并同样确定应该应用的逆量化程度。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be used for inverse quantization (ie, inverse quantization) of the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304. The inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also to determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
逆变换处理单元312用于将逆变换(例如,逆DCT、逆整数变换或概念上类似的逆变换过程)应用于变换系数,以便在像素域中产生残差块。The inverse transform processing unit 312 is configured to apply an inverse transform (for example, an inverse DCT, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
重构单元314(例如,求和器314)用于将逆变换块313(即经重构残差块313)添加到预测块365,以在样本域中获取经重构块315,例如通过将经重构残差块313的样本值与预测块365的样本值相加。Reconstruction unit 314 (e.g., summer 314) is used to add inverse transform block 313 (i.e., reconstructed residual block 313) to prediction block 365 to obtain reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, such as by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.
环路滤波器单元320(在编码循环期间或在编码循环之后)用于对经重构块315进行滤波以获取经滤波块321,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。在一个实例中,环路滤波器单元320可以用于执行下文描述的滤波技术的任意组合。环路滤波器单元320旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset,SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器,例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter,ALF),或锐化或平滑滤波器,或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元320在图3中示出为环内滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元320可实施为环后滤波器。The loop filter unit 320 (during or after the encoding cycle) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. In one example, the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below. The loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as a deblocking filter, a sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filter, or other filters such as a bilateral filter, Adaptive loop filters (adaptive loop filters, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filters, or cooperative filters. Although the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
随后将给定帧或图片中的经解码视频块321存储在存储用于后续运动补偿的参考图片的经解码图片缓冲器330中。The decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
解码器30用于例如,藉由输出332输出经解码图片31,以向用户呈现或供用户查看。The decoder 30 is used, for example, to output a decoded picture 31 through an output 332 for presentation to or review by a user.
视频解码器30的其它变型可用于对压缩的比特流进行解码。例如,解码器30可以在没有环路滤波器单元320的情况下生成输出视频流。例如,基于非变换的解码器30可以在没有针对某些块或帧的逆变换处理单元312的情况下直接逆量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中,视频解码器30可以具有组合成单个单元的逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312。Other variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream. For example, the decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without the loop filter unit 320. For example, the non-transform-based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
图4是根据一示例性实施例的包含图2的编码器20和/或图3的解码器30的视频编码系统40的实例的说明图。系统40可以实现本申请的各种技术的组合。在所说明的实施方式中,视频编码系统40可以包含成像设备41、视频编码器20、视频解码器30(和/或藉由处理单元46的逻辑电路47实施的视频编码器)、天线42、一个或多个处理器43、一个或多个存储器44和/或显示设备45。4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video encoding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and / or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3 according to an exemplary embodiment. The system 40 may implement a combination of various techniques of the present application. In the illustrated embodiment, the video encoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, a video encoder 20, a video decoder 30 (and / or a video encoder implemented by the logic circuit 47 of the processing unit 46), an antenna 42, One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44, and / or a display device 45.
如图所示,成像设备41、天线42、处理单元46、逻辑电路47、视频编码器20、视频解码器30、处理器43、存储器44和/或显示设备45能够互相通信。如所论述,虽然用视频编码器20和视频解码器30绘示视频编码系统40,但在不同实例中,视频编码系统40可以只包含视频编码器20或只包含视频解码器30。As shown, the imaging device 41, antenna 42, processing unit 46, logic circuit 47, video encoder 20, video decoder 30, processor 43, memory 44, and / or display device 45 can communicate with each other. As discussed, although video encoding system 40 is shown with video encoder 20 and video decoder 30, in different examples, video encoding system 40 may include only video encoder 20 or only video decoder 30.
在一些实例中,如图所示,视频编码系统40可以包含天线42。例如,天线42可以用于传输或接收视频数据的经编码比特流。另外,在一些实例中,视频编码系统40可以包含显示设备45。显示设备45可以用于呈现视频数据。在一些实例中,如图所示,逻辑电路47可以通过处理单元46实施。处理单元46可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。视频编码系统40也可以包含可选处理器43,该可选处理器43类似地可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。在一些实例中,逻辑电路47可以通过硬件实施,如视频编码专用硬件等,处理器43可以通过通用软件、操作系统等实施。另外,存储器44可以是任何类型的存储器,例如易失性存储器(例如,静态随机存取存储器(Static Random Access  Memory,SRAM)、动态随机存储器(Dynamic Random Access Memory,DRAM)等)或非易失性存储器(例如,闪存等)等。在非限制性实例中,存储器44可以由超速缓存内存实施。在一些实例中,逻辑电路47可以访问存储器44(例如用于实施图像缓冲器)。在其它实例中,逻辑电路47和/或处理单元46可以包含存储器(例如,缓存等)用于实施图像缓冲器等。In some examples, as shown, the video encoding system 40 may include an antenna 42. For example, the antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bit stream of video data. In addition, in some examples, the video encoding system 40 may include a display device 45. The display device 45 may be used to present video data. In some examples, as shown, the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by the processing unit 46. The processing unit 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. The video encoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, and the processor 43 may be implemented by general software, operating system, and the like. In addition, the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (for example, Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM), etc.) or non-volatile memory Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.). In a non-limiting example, the memory 44 may be implemented by a cache memory. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 may access the memory 44 (eg, for implementing an image buffer). In other examples, the logic circuit 47 and / or the processing unit 46 may include a memory (eg, a cache, etc.) for implementing an image buffer or the like.
在一些实例中,通过逻辑电路实施的视频编码器20可以包含(例如,通过处理单元46或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的视频编码器20,以实施参照图2和/或本文中所描述的任何其它编码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。逻辑电路可以用于执行本文所论述的各种操作。In some examples, video encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by processing unit 46 or memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing unit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include a video encoder 20 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and / or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Logic circuits can be used to perform various operations discussed herein.
视频解码器30可以以类似方式通过逻辑电路47实施,以实施参照图3的解码器30和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。在一些实例中,逻辑电路实施的视频解码器30可以包含(通过处理单元2820或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的视频解码器30,以实施参照图3和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。 Video decoder 30 may be implemented in a similar manner by logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and / or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein. In some examples, video decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by processing unit 2820 or memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by processing unit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include a video decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and / or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.
在一些实例中,视频编码系统40的天线42可以用于接收视频数据的经编码比特流。如所论述,经编码比特流可以包含本文所论述的与编码视频帧相关的数据、指示符、索引值、模式选择数据等,例如与编码分割相关的数据(例如,变换系数或经量化变换系数,(如所论述的)可选指示符,和/或定义编码分割的数据)。视频编码系统40还可包含耦合至天线42并用于解码经编码比特流的视频解码器30。显示设备45用于呈现视频帧。In some examples, the antenna 42 of the video encoding system 40 may be used to receive an encoded bit stream of video data. As discussed, the encoded bitstream may contain data, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. related to encoded video frames discussed herein, such as data related to coded segmentation (e.g., transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients) , (As discussed) optional indicators, and / or data defining code partitions). The video encoding system 40 may also include a video decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream. The display device 45 is used to present video frames.
图5是根据一示例性实施例的可用作图1中的源设备12和目的地设备14中的任一个或两个的装置500的简化框图。装置500可以实现本申请的技术,装置500可以采用包含多个计算设备的计算系统的形式,或采用例如移动电话、平板计算机、膝上型计算机、笔记本电脑、台式计算机等单个计算设备的形式。FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1 according to an exemplary embodiment. The device 500 may implement the technology of the present application. The device 500 may be in the form of a computing system including a plurality of computing devices, or in the form of a single computing device such as a mobile phone, tablet computer, laptop computer, notebook computer, desktop computer, and the like.
装置500中的处理器502可以为中央处理器。或者,处理器502可以为现有的或今后将研发出的能够操控或处理信息的任何其它类型的设备或多个设备。如图所示,虽然可以使用例如处理器502的单个处理器实践所揭示的实施方式,但是使用一个以上处理器可以实现速度和效率方面的优势。The processor 502 in the apparatus 500 may be a central processing unit. Alternatively, the processor 502 may be any other type of device or multiple devices capable of manipulating or processing information, existing or to be developed in the future. As shown, although a single processor such as the processor 502 can be used to practice the disclosed embodiments, speed and efficiency advantages can be achieved using more than one processor.
在一实施方式中,装置500中的存储器504可以为只读存储器(Read Only Memory,ROM)设备或随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)设备。任何其他合适类型的存储设备都可以用作存储器504。存储器504可以包括代码和由处理器502使用总线512访问的数据506。存储器504可进一步包括操作系统508和应用程序510,应用程序510包含至少一个准许处理器502执行本文所描述的方法的程序。例如,应用程序510可以包括应用1到N,应用1到N进一步包括执行本文所描述的方法的视频编码应用。装置500还可包含采用从存储器514形式的附加存储器,该从存储器514例如可以为与移动计算设备一起使用的存储卡。因为视频通信会话可能含有大量信息,这些信息可以整体或部分存储在从存储器514中,并按需要加载到存储器504用于处理。In one embodiment, the memory 504 in the device 500 may be a read-only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device can be used as the memory 504. The memory 504 may include code and data 506 accessed by the processor 502 using the bus 512. The memory 504 may further include an operating system 508 and an application program 510, which contains at least one program that permits the processor 502 to perform the methods described herein. For example, the application program 510 may include applications 1 to N, and applications 1 to N further include a video encoding application that performs the methods described herein. The device 500 may also include additional memory in the form of a slave memory 514, which may be, for example, a memory card for use with a mobile computing device. Because a video communication session may contain a large amount of information, this information may be stored in whole or in part in the slave memory 514 and loaded into the memory 504 for processing as needed.
装置500还可包含一或多个输出设备,例如显示器518。在一个实例中,显示器518可以为将显示器和可操作以感测触摸输入的触敏元件组合的触敏显示器。显示器518可以通过总线512耦合于处理器502。除了显示器518还可以提供其它准许用户对装置500编程或以其它方式使用装置500的输出设备,或提供其它输出设备作为显示器518的替代方案。当输出设备是显示器或包含显示器时,显示器可以以不同方式实现,包含通过液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD)、阴极射线管(cathode-ray tube,CRT)显示器、等离子显示器或发光二极管(light emitting diode,LED)显示器,如有机LED(organic LED,OLED)显示器。The apparatus 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 518. In one example, the display 518 may be a touch-sensitive display combining a display and a touch-sensitive element operable to sense a touch input. The display 518 may be coupled to the processor 502 through a bus 512. In addition to the display 518, other output devices may be provided that allow the user to program or otherwise use the device 500, or provide other output devices as an alternative to the display 518. When the output device is a display or contains a display, the display can be implemented in different ways, including through a liquid crystal display (LCD), a cathode-ray tube (CRT) display, a plasma display, or a light emitting diode diode (LED) displays, such as organic LED (OLED) displays.
装置500还可包含图像感测设备520或与其连通,图像感测设备520例如为相机或为现有的或今后将研发出的可以感测图像的任何其它图像感测设备520,所述图像例如为运行装置500的用户的图像。图像感测设备520可以放置为直接面向运行装置500的用户。在一实例中,可以配置图像感测设备520的位置和光轴以使其视野包含紧邻显示器518的区域且从该区域可见显示器518。The apparatus 500 may further include or be in communication with an image sensing device 520, such as a camera or any other image sensing device 520 that can or will be developed in the future to sense an image, such as An image of a user running the device 500. The image sensing device 520 may be placed directly facing a user of the running apparatus 500. In an example, the position and optical axis of the image sensing device 520 may be configured such that its field of view includes an area immediately adjacent to the display 518 and the display 518 is visible from the area.
装置500还可包含声音感测设备522或与其连通,声音感测设备522例如为麦克风或为现有的或今后将研发出的可以感测装置500附近的声音的任何其它声音感测设备。声音感测设备522可以放置为直接面向运行装置500的用户,并可以用于接收用户在运行装置500时发出的声音,例如语音或其它发声。The device 500 may also include or be in communication with a sound sensing device 522, such as a microphone or any other sound sensing device that can or will be developed in the future to sense the sound near the device 500. The sound sensing device 522 may be placed directly facing the user of the operating device 500 and may be used to receive a sound, such as a voice or other sound, emitted by the user when the device 500 is running.
虽然图5中将装置500的处理器502和存储器504绘示为集成在单个单元中,但是还可以使用其它配置。处理器502的运行可以分布在多个可直接耦合的机器中(每个机器具有一个或多个处理器),或分布在本地区域或其它网络中。存储器504可以分布在多个机器中,例如基于网络的存储器或多个运行装置500的机器中的存储器。虽然此处只绘示单个总线,但装置500的总线512可以由多个总线形成。进一步地,从存储器514可以直接耦合至装置500的其它组件或可以通过网络访问,并且可包括单个集成单元,例如一个存储卡,或多个单元,例如多个存储卡。因此,可以以多种配置实施装置500。Although the processor 502 and the memory 504 of the apparatus 500 are shown in FIG. 5 as being integrated in a single unit, other configurations may be used. The operation of the processor 502 may be distributed among multiple directly-coupled machines (each machine has one or more processors), or distributed in a local area or other network. The memory 504 may be distributed among multiple machines, such as a network-based memory or a memory among multiple machines running the apparatus 500. Although only a single bus is shown here, the bus 512 of the device 500 may be formed by multiple buses. Further, the slave memory 514 may be directly coupled to other components of the device 500 or may be accessed through a network, and may include a single integrated unit, such as one memory card, or multiple units, such as multiple memory cards. Therefore, the apparatus 500 can be implemented in various configurations.
图6描述了二叉树,三叉树以及四叉树的划分方式,其中:Figure 6 describes the division of binary tree, tri-tree and quad-tree, where:
四叉树是一种树状结构,表示一个节点可划分为四个子节点。H265视频编码标准采用基于四叉树的 CTU划分方式:CTU作为根节点,每个节点对应于一个方形的区域;一个节点可以不再划分(此时它对应的区域为一个CU),或者将这个节点划分成四个下一层级的节点,即把这个方形区域划分成四个大小相同的方形区域(其长、宽各为划分前区域长、宽的一半),每个区域对应于一个节点。如图6(a)所示。A quadtree is a tree-like structure, meaning that a node can be divided into four child nodes. The H265 video coding standard uses a quadtree-based CTU division method: the CTU serves as the root node, and each node corresponds to a square area; a node can no longer be divided (in this case, its corresponding area is a CU), or this The node is divided into four nodes at the next lower level, that is, the square area is divided into four square areas of the same size (the length and width are each half of the length and width of the area before division), and each area corresponds to a node. As shown in Figure 6 (a).
二叉树是一种树状结构,表示一个节点可划分成两个子节点。现有采用二叉树的编码方法中,一个二叉树结构上的节点可以不划分,或者把此节点划分成两个下一层级的节点。划分成两个节点的方式有两种:1)水平二分,将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,如图6(b)所示;或者2)竖直二分,将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个大小相同的区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,如图6(c)所示。A binary tree is a tree-like structure, meaning that a node can be divided into two child nodes. In the existing encoding method using a binary tree, a node on a binary tree structure may not be divided, or this node may be divided into two nodes at a lower level. There are two ways to divide into two nodes: 1) Horizontal dichotomy, divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size, each area corresponds to a node, as shown in Figure 6 (b); Or 2) Divide vertically and divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size on the left and right, and each area corresponds to a node, as shown in Figure 6 (c).
三叉树是一种树状结构,表示一个节点可划分成三个子节点。现有采用三叉树的编码方法中,一个三叉树结构上的节点可以不划分,或者把此节点划分成三个下一层级的节点。划分成三个节点的方式有两种:1)水平三分,将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中上、中、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4,如图6(d)所示;或者2)竖直三分,将节点对应的区域划分成左、中、右三个区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4,如图6(e)所示。A triple tree is a tree-like structure, meaning that a node can be divided into three child nodes. In the existing coding method using a tri-tree, the nodes on a tri-tree structure may not be divided, or this node may be divided into three lower-level nodes. There are two ways to divide into three nodes: 1) Horizontal three points, the area corresponding to the node is divided into three areas of upper, middle and lower, each area corresponds to a node, including three areas of upper, middle and lower The heights of the nodes are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, as shown in Figure 6 (d); or 2) vertical three points, divide the area corresponding to the node into three left, middle, and right Area, each area corresponds to a node, where the widths of the left, middle, and right three areas are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, as shown in Figure 6 (e).
H.265视频编码标准把一帧图像分割成互不重叠的编码树单元(CTU),CTU的大小可设置为64×64(CTU的大小也可设置为其它值,如JVET参考软件JEM中CTU大小增大为128×128或256×256)。64×64的CTU包含由64列、每列64个像素的矩形像素点阵,每个像素包含亮度分量或/和色度分量。The H.265 video coding standard divides a frame of image into non-overlapping coding tree units (CTU). The size of the CTU can be set to 64 × 64 (the size of the CTU can also be set to other values, such as the CTU in the JVET reference software JEM The size is increased to 128 × 128 or 256 × 256). A 64 × 64 CTU contains a rectangular pixel lattice of 64 columns and 64 pixels in each column, and each pixel contains a luminance component and / or a chrominance component.
H.265使用基于四叉树(quad-tree,简称QT)的CTU划分方法,将CTU作为四叉树的根节点(root),按照四叉树的划分方式,将CTU递归划分成若干个叶节点(leaf node)。一个节点对应于一个图像区域,节点如果不划分,则节点称为叶节点,它对应的图像区域形成一个CU;如果节点继续划分,则节点对应的图像区域划分成四个相同大小的区域(其长和宽各为被划分区域的一半),每个区域对应一个节点,需要分别确定这些节点是否还会划分。一个节点是否划分由码流中这个节点对应的划分标志位split_cu_flag指示。一个节点A划分一次得到4个节点Bi,i=0,1,2,3,Bi称为A的子节点,A称为Bi的父节点。根节点的四叉树层级(qtDepth)为0,节点的四叉树层级为节点的父节点的四叉树层级加1。为表述简洁,下文中节点的大小和形状即指节点对应的图像区域的大小和形状。H.265 uses a quad-tree (QT) -based CTU division method. The CTU is used as the root node of the quad tree, and the CTU is recursively divided into several leaves according to the quad tree division method. Node (leaf). A node corresponds to an image area. If the node is not divided, the node is called a leaf node, and its corresponding image area forms a CU. If the node continues to be divided, the image area corresponding to the node is divided into four regions of the same size (the (The length and width are each half of the divided area.) Each area corresponds to a node. You need to determine whether these nodes will be divided separately. Whether a node is divided is indicated by the split flag bit split_cu_flag corresponding to this node in the code stream. A node A is divided into four nodes Bi, i = 0, 1, 2, 3, Bi is called a child node of A, and A is called a parent node of Bi. The quadtree level (qtDepth) of the root node is 0, and the quadtree level of the node is the quadtree level of the parent node of the node plus 1. For brevity, the size and shape of the nodes in the following refers to the size and shape of the image area corresponding to the nodes.
更具体的,对64×64的CTU节点(四叉树层级为0),根据它对应的split_cu_flag,可选择不划分,成为1个64×64的CU,或者选择划分为4个32×32的节点(四叉树层级为1)。这四个32×32的节点中的每一个节点,又可以根据它对应的split_cu_flag,选择继续划分或者不划分;如果一个32×32的节点继续划分,则产生四个16×16的节点(四叉树层级为2)。以此类推,直到所有节点都不再划分,这样一个CTU就被划分成一组CU。CU的最小尺寸(size)在序列参数集(SPS:Sequence Parameter Set)中标识,例如8×8为最小CU。在上述递归划分过程中,如果一个节点的尺寸等于最小CU尺寸(minimum CU size),这个节点默认为不再划分,同时也不需要在码流中包含它的划分标志位。More specifically, for a 64 × 64 CTU node (the quadtree level is 0), according to its corresponding split_cu_flag, you can choose not to divide it into a 64 × 64 CU, or choose to divide it into 4 32 × 32 Nodes (the quadtree level is 1). Each of these four 32 × 32 nodes can choose to continue to divide or not to divide according to its corresponding split_cu_flag; if a 32 × 32 node continues to divide, four 16 × 16 nodes (four The level of the fork tree is 2). And so on, until all nodes are no longer divided, such a CTU is divided into a group of CUs. The minimum size (size) of the CU is identified in the sequence parameter set (SPS: Sequence Parameter Set). For example, 8 × 8 is the smallest CU. In the above recursive division process, if the size of a node is equal to the minimum CU size, this node defaults to no longer divide, and it does not need to include its division flag in the code stream.
当解析到一个节点为叶节点后,此叶节点为一个CU,进一步解析CU对应的编码信息(包括CU的预测模式、变换系数等信息,例如H.265中的coding_unit()语法结构体),然后按照这些编码信息对CU进行预测、反量化、反变换、环路滤波等解码处理,产生这个CU对应的重建图像。四叉树结构使得CTU能够根据图像局部特点划分成合适大小的一组CU,例如平滑区域划分成较大的CU,而纹理丰富区域划分为较小的CU。When a node is parsed as a leaf node, this leaf node is a CU, and further analyzes the coding information corresponding to the CU (including the prediction mode and transformation coefficients of the CU, such as the coding_unit () syntax structure in H.265). Then, the CU is subjected to decoding, prediction, inverse quantization, inverse transform, and loop filtering according to the encoded information to generate a reconstructed image corresponding to the CU. The quad-tree structure enables the CTU to be divided into a group of CUs of a suitable size according to the local characteristics of the image, for example, smooth regions are divided into larger CUs, and texture-rich regions are divided into smaller CUs.
多用途视频编码测试模型(VTM:Versatile video coding Test Model)参考软件在四叉树划分的基础上,增加了二叉树(binary tree,简称BT)划分方式和三叉树(ternary tree,简称TT)划分方式。其中,VTM是JVET组织开发的新式编解码器参考软件。Multi-purpose video coding test model (VTM: Versatile video coding Test Model) reference software adds a binary tree (BT) partition method and a ternary tree (TT) partition method based on the quadtree partition . Among them, VTM is a new codec reference software developed by JVET organization.
二叉树划分将一个节点划分成2个子节点,具体的二叉树划分方式有两种:Binary tree partitioning divides a node into two sub-nodes. There are two specific binary tree partitioning methods:
1)水平二分:将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域(即宽不变,高变为划分前区域的一半),每个区域对应于一个节点;如图6(b)所示。1) Horizontal dichotomy: Divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size (that is, the width does not change, and the height becomes half of the area before the division), and each area corresponds to a node; as shown in Figure 6 (b ).
2)竖直二分:将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个相同大小的区域(即高不变,宽变为划分前区域的一半);如图6(c)所示。2) Vertical dichotomy: Divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size, namely the left and right (that is, the height remains unchanged, and the width becomes half of the area before division);
三叉树划分将一个节点划分成3个子节点,具体的三叉树划分方式有两种:Three-tree partitioning divides a node into three sub-nodes. There are two specific methods for three-tree partitioning:
1)水平三分:将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中上、中、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4,如图6(d)所示;1) Horizontal three points: divide the area corresponding to the node into three areas: upper, middle, and lower, each area corresponds to a node, where the height of the three areas is 1/4 of the height of the node, 1/2, 1/4, as shown in Figure 6 (d);
2)竖直三分:将节点对应的区域划分成左、中、右三个区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4,如图6(e)所示2) Vertical three points: Dividing the area corresponding to the node into three areas: left, middle, and right, each area corresponds to a node, where the width of the three areas is 1/4 of the node height. , 1/2, 1/4, as shown in Figure 6 (e)
VTM中使用了QT级联BT/TT的划分方式,简称为QT-MTT(Quad Tree plus Multi-Type Tree)划分方式。更具体的,CTU通过QT划分,产生QT叶节点,QT中的节点可使用四叉树划分继续划分成四个QT子节点,或者不使用四叉划分产生一个QT叶节点。QT叶节点作为MTT的根节点。MTT中的节点可使用水平二分、竖直二分、水平三分、竖直三分这四种划分方式中的一种划分为子节点,或者不再划分成为一个MTT叶节 点。MTT的叶节点为一个编码单元CU。The division method of QT cascade BT / TT is used in VTM, referred to as QT-MTT (Quad Tree Plus Multi-Type Tree) division method. More specifically, the CTU generates QT leaf nodes through QT division. The nodes in the QT can be further divided into four QT child nodes using quad-tree division, or a QT leaf node can be generated without using quad-section division. The QT leaf node serves as the root node of the MTT. Nodes in MTT can be divided into sub-nodes using one of the four division methods: horizontal dichotomy, vertical dichotomy, horizontal dichotomy, and vertical dichotomy, or they can no longer be divided into one MTT leaf node. The leaf node of MTT is a coding unit CU.
图7给出了使用QT-MTT将一个CTU划分成a到p等16个CU的示例。图7右图中每个端点表示一个节点,一个节点连出4根线表示四叉树划分,一个节点连出2根线表示二叉树划分,一个节点连出3根线表示三叉树划分。实线表示QT划分,虚线表示多类型划分(MTT:Multi-Type Tree)的第一层划分,点划线表示MTT的第二层划分。a到p为16个MTT叶节点,每个MTT叶节点为1个CU。一个CTU按照图7右图的划分方式,得到了如图7左图所示的CU划分图。Figure 7 shows an example of dividing a CTU into 16 CUs such as a to p using QT-MTT. Each endpoint on the right of Figure 7 represents a node, 4 nodes connected to a node represent quadtree partition, 2 nodes connected to a node represent binary tree partition, and 3 nodes connected to a node represent tritree partition. The solid line represents the QT division, the dashed line represents the first-level division of a Multi-Type Tree (MTT), and the dot-dash line represents the second-level division of the MTT. a to p are 16 MTT leaf nodes, and each MTT leaf node is 1 CU. A CTU obtains the CU division diagram shown in the left diagram of FIG. 7 according to the division manner in the right diagram of FIG. 7.
QT-MTT划分方式中,每个CU具有QT层级(Quad-tree depth,QT depth,也称为QT深度)和MTT层级(Multi-Type Tree depth,MTT depth,也称为MTT深度)。QT层级表示CU所属的QT叶节点的QT层级,MTT层级表示CU所属MTT叶节点的MTT层级。编码树的根节点的QT层级为0,MTT层级为0。如果编码树上一个节点使用QT划分,则划分得到的子节点的QT层级为该节点的QT层级加1,MTT层级不变;相似的,如果编码树上一个节点使用MTT划分(即BT或TT划分之一),则划分得到的子节点的MTT层级为该节点的MTT层级加1,QT层级不变。例如图1中a、b、c、d、e、f、g、i、j的QT层级为1,MTT层级为2;h的QT层级为1,MTT层级为1;n、o、p的QT层级为2,MTT层级为0;l、m的QT层级为2,MTTT层级为1。如果CTU只划分成一个CU,则此CU的QT层级为0,MTT层级为0。In the QT-MTT division method, each CU has a QT level (Quad-tree depth, QT depth, also called QT depth) and an MTT level (Multi-Type Tree depth, MTT depth, also called MTT depth). The QT level indicates the QT level of the QT leaf node to which the CU belongs, and the MTT level indicates the MTT level of the MTT leaf node to which the CU belongs. The root node of the coding tree has a QT level of 0 and an MTT level of 0. If a node on the coding tree is divided by QT, the QT level of the child node obtained by the division is the QT level of the node plus 1, and the MTT level is unchanged. Similarly, if a node on the coding tree is divided by MTT (that is, BT or TT One of the divisions), the MTT level of the child node obtained by the division is the MTT level of the node plus 1, and the QT level is unchanged. For example, in Figure 1, the QT level of a, b, c, d, e, f, g, i, and j is 1, and the MTT level is 2; the QT level of h is 1, and the MTT level is 1; for n, o, and p The QT level is 2 and the MTT level is 0; the QT level for l and m is 2 and the MTTT level is 1. If the CTU is divided into only one CU, the QT level of this CU is 0 and the MTT level is 0.
经过上述的各种划分之后,编码树下的叶子节点位置的图像块作为编码单元,编码过程主要包括帧内预测(Intra Prediction)、帧间预测(Inter Prediction)、变换(Transform)、量化(Quantization)、熵编码(Entropy encode)、环内滤波(in-loop filtering)(主要为去块滤波,de-blocking filtering)等环节,可通过本文在图1至图5所介绍的编解码器所实现。即,将图像划分为编码单元之后进行帧内预测或者帧间预测,并且在得到残差之后进行变换量化,最终进行熵编码并输出码流。此处编码单元为由像素点组成的M×N大小的阵列(M可以等于N,也可以不等于N),并且已知各个像素点位置的像素值。After the above various divisions, the image block at the leaf node position under the coding tree is used as the coding unit. The coding process mainly includes intra prediction (Intertra Prediction), inter prediction (Inter Prediction), transformation (Transform), and quantization (Quantization). ), Entropy encoding, in-loop filtering (mainly de-blocking filtering), etc., can be implemented by the codec described in Figures 1 to 5 of this article . That is, intra-frame prediction or inter-frame prediction is performed after the image is divided into coding units, and transform and quantization are performed after the residual is obtained, and finally entropy coding is performed and a code stream is output. Here, the coding unit is an array of M × N size composed of pixels (M may be equal to N or not equal to N), and the pixel value of each pixel point position is known.
帧内预测是指利用当前图像内已重建区域内像素点的像素值对当前图像块/编码单元内像素点的像素值进行预测。Intra prediction refers to using the pixel values of pixels in the reconstructed area in the current image to predict the pixel values of pixels in the current image block / coding unit.
帧间预测是在已重建的图像中,为当前图像中的当前图像块/编码单元寻找匹配的参考块,将参考块中的像素点的像素值作为当前图像块/编码单元中像素点的像素值的预测信息或者预测值(以下不再区分信息和值),此过程称为运动估计(Motion estimation,ME),并传输当前图像块/编码单元的运动信息。Inter prediction is to find a matching reference block for the current image block / encoding unit in the current image in the reconstructed image, and use the pixel value of the pixel point in the reference block as the pixel of the pixel point in the current image block / encoding unit. Value prediction information or prediction value (in the following, information and values are no longer distinguished), this process is called motion estimation (ME), and the motion information of the current image block / coding unit is transmitted.
需要说明的是,当前图像块/编码单元的运动信息包括了预测方向的指示信息(通常为前向预测、后向预测或者双向预测),一个或两个指向参考块的运动矢量(Motion vector,MV),以及参考块所在图像的指示信息(通常记为参考帧索引,Reference index)。It should be noted that the motion information of the current image block / coding unit includes indication information of the prediction direction (usually forward prediction, backward prediction, or bidirectional prediction), and one or two motion vectors (Motion vector, MV), and indication information of the picture where the reference block is located (usually referred to as a reference frame index, Reference index).
前向预测是指当前图像块/编码单元从前向参考图像集合中选择一个参考图像获取参考块。后向预测是指当前编码单元从后向参考图像集合中选择一个参考图像获取参考块。双向预测是指从前向和后向参考图像集合中各选择一个参考图像获取参考块。当使用双向预测方法时,当前编码单元会存在两个参考块,每个参考块各自需要运动矢量和参考帧索引进行指示,然后根据两个参考块内像素点的像素值确定当前块内像素点像素值的预测值。Forward prediction refers to that the current image block / coding unit selects a reference image from the forward reference image set to obtain a reference block. Backward prediction refers to that the current coding unit selects a reference image from a set of backward reference images to obtain a reference block. Bidirectional prediction refers to selecting a reference image from the forward and backward reference image sets to obtain a reference block. When the bidirectional prediction method is used, there are two reference blocks in the current coding unit, and each reference block needs a motion vector and a reference frame index to indicate, and then the pixel points in the current block are determined according to the pixel values of the pixel points in the two reference blocks. The predicted value of the pixel value.
运动估计过程需要为当前图像块/编码单元在参考图像中尝试多个参考块,最终使用哪一个或者哪几个参考块用作预测则使用率失真优化(Rate-distortion optimization,RDO)或者其他方法确定。The motion estimation process needs to try multiple reference blocks in the reference image for the current image block / coding unit. Which one or several reference blocks are ultimately used for prediction is Rate-distortion optimization (RDO) or other methods. determine.
利用帧内预测或者帧间预测得到预测信息之后,当前图像块/编码单元内像素点的像素值减去对应的预测信息便得到残差信息,然后利用离散余弦变换(Discrete Cosine Transformation,DCT)等方法对残差信息进行变换,再使用量化熵编码得到码流。预测信号加上重建残差信号之后需进一步进行滤波操作,进而得到重建信号,并将其作为后续编码的参考信号。After obtaining the prediction information by using intra prediction or inter prediction, the pixel value of the pixel point in the current image block / coding unit is subtracted from the corresponding prediction information to obtain residual information, and then Discrete Cosine Transformation (DCT), etc. The method transforms the residual information, and then uses quantized entropy coding to obtain the code stream. After the prediction signal is added with the reconstructed residual signal, further filtering operations are required to obtain a reconstructed signal and use it as a reference signal for subsequent encoding.
解码则相当于编码的逆过程。首先利用熵解码反量化反变换得到残差信息,解码码流确定当前编码单元使用的是帧内预测还是帧间预测。如果是帧内预测,则利用周围已重建区域内像素点的像素值按照所使用的帧内预测方法构建预测信息。如果是帧间预测,则需要解析出运动信息,并使用所解析出的运动信息在已重建的图像中确定参考块,并将块内像素点的像素值作为预测信息,此过程称为运动补偿(Motion compensation,MC)。使用预测信息加上残差信息经过滤波操作便可以得到重建信息。Decoding is equivalent to the reverse process of encoding. First, the residual information is obtained by inverse quantization and inverse transformation using entropy decoding, and the decoded bitstream determines whether the current coding unit uses intra prediction or inter prediction. If it is intra prediction, the pixel information of pixels in the surrounding reconstructed area is used to construct prediction information according to the used intra prediction method. If it is inter prediction, you need to parse out the motion information, use the parsed motion information to determine the reference block in the reconstructed image, and use the pixel values of the pixels in the block as prediction information. This process is called motion compensation (Motion Compensation, MC). Reconstruction information can be obtained by using prediction information plus residual information through a filtering operation.
在HEVC中,使用两种帧间预测模式,分别为先进的运动矢量预测(Advanced Motion Vector Prediction,AMVP)模式和融合(Merge)模式。In HEVC, two inter-prediction modes are used, namely, Advanced Motion Vector Prediction (AMVP) mode and Merge mode.
对于AMVP模式,先通过当前图像块/编码单元空域或者时域相邻的已编码单元的运动信息获得空域候选或时域候选,构建运动矢量预测候选列表,然后通过从运动矢量预测候选列表中确定最优的运动矢量作为当前图像块/编码单元的运动矢量预测值(Motion vector predictor,MVP)。编码端将选择的运动矢量预测值在运动矢量预测候选列表中的索引值和参考帧索引值传递到解码端。进一步地,在MVP为中心的邻域内进行运动搜索获得当前图像块/编码单元实际的运动矢量,编码端将MVP与实际运动矢量之间的差值(Motion vector difference)传递到解码端。For AMVP mode, first obtain spatial or temporal candidates from the motion information of the current image block / coding unit in the spatial or temporally adjacent coded units, construct a motion vector prediction candidate list, and then determine from the motion vector prediction candidate list The optimal motion vector is used as the motion vector predictor (MVP) of the current image block / coding unit. The encoding end passes the index value of the selected motion vector prediction value in the motion vector prediction candidate list and the reference frame index value to the decoding end. Further, a motion search is performed in the neighborhood centered on the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current image block / encoding unit, and the encoding end transmits the difference (Motion vector difference) between the MVP and the actual motion vector to the decoding end.
对于Merge模式,先通过当前编码单元空域或者时域相邻的已编码单元的运动信息获得空域候选和时域候选,构建融合运动信息候选列表,然后通过率失真代价从融合运动信息候选列表中确定最优的运动 信息作为当前编码单元的运动信息,再将最优的运动信息在融合运动信息候选列表中位置的索引值(记为merge index,下同)传递到解码端。For the Merge mode, first obtain spatial and temporal candidates from the motion information of the current coding unit in the spatial or temporally adjacent coded units, construct a fusion motion information candidate list, and then determine from the fusion motion information candidate list at the rate-distortion cost. The optimal motion information is used as the motion information of the current coding unit, and then the index value of the position of the optimal motion information in the fusion motion information candidate list (denoted as merge index, the same below) is transmitted to the decoding end.
来自当前编码单元空域或者时域相邻的已编码单元的运动信息的当前编码单元空域候选和时域候选如8所示,空域候选来自于空间相邻的5个块(A0,A1,B0,B1和B2),通过依次循序检查A1、B1、B0、A0和B2,最多可以在合并列表中以所述顺序插入四个候选者。除了仅仅检查相邻块是否可用并含有运动信息,在将相邻块的所有运动数据作为合并候选者之前执行一些另外的冗余检查。这些冗余检查可以分为两类,用于两个不同的目的:a.避免列表中存在具有冗余运动数据的候选者;b.防止合并两个可以用其它方式表示的会产生冗余语法的分区。The current coding unit spatial and time domain candidates from the motion information of the current coding unit spatial domain or temporally adjacent coded units are shown in Figure 8. The spatial domain candidates come from the five spatially adjacent blocks (A0, A1, B0, B1 and B2), by sequentially checking A1, B1, B0, A0, and B2 in sequence, up to four candidates can be inserted in the merge list in the stated order. In addition to only checking whether neighboring blocks are available and containing motion information, some additional redundancy checks are performed before using all motion data of neighboring blocks as merge candidates. These redundancy checks can be divided into two categories for two different purposes: a. Avoiding candidates with redundant motion data in the list; b. Preventing the merging of two redundant syntaxes that can be represented in other ways Partition.
当N是空间合并候选者的数量时,完整的冗余检查将由
Figure PCTCN2019107931-appb-000001
次运动数据比较组成。在五个潜在空间合并候选者的情况下,将需要十次运动数据比较来确保合并列表中的所有候选者具有不同的运动数据。在开发HEVC期间,对冗余运动数据的检查已经减少到一个子集,从而在比较逻辑明显减少的同时保持编码效率。在最终设计中,对于每个候选者执行不超过两次比较,从而产生总共五次比较。给定{A1,B1,B0,A0,B2}的顺序,B0只检查B1,A0只检查A1,且B2只检查A1和B1。在分区冗余检查的实施例中,通过选择候选者B1来将2N×N分区的底部PU与顶部PU合并。这将产生一个CU具有两个具有相同运动数据的PU,其可以被均等地用信号表示为2N×2N CU。总体而言,这种检查适用于矩形和不对称分区2N×N、2N×nU、2N×nD、N×2N、nR×2N和nL×2N的所有第二PU。应注意,对于空间合并候选者,仅执行冗余检查,并且按原样从候选块复制运动数据。因此,这里不需要运动矢量缩放。
When N is the number of spatial merge candidates, the complete redundancy check will be determined by
Figure PCTCN2019107931-appb-000001
Comparison of secondary exercise data. In the case of five potential spatial merge candidates, ten motion data comparisons will be required to ensure that all candidates in the merge list have different motion data. During the development of HEVC, the inspection of redundant motion data has been reduced to a subset, thereby maintaining a significant reduction in comparison logic while maintaining coding efficiency. In the final design, no more than two comparisons are performed for each candidate, resulting in a total of five comparisons. Given the order of {A1, B1, B0, A0, B2}, B0 checks only B1, A0 checks only A1, and B2 checks only A1 and B1. In the embodiment of partition redundancy check, the bottom PU and top PU of the 2N × N partition are merged by selecting candidate B1. This will result in one CU having two PUs with the same motion data, which can be signaled equally as a 2N × 2N CU. Overall, this check applies to all second PUs with rectangular and asymmetric partitions 2N × N, 2N × nU, 2N × nD, N × 2N, nR × 2N, and nL × 2N. It should be noted that for the spatial merge candidate, only the redundancy check is performed, and the motion data is copied from the candidate block as it is. Therefore, no motion vector scaling is needed here.
时间合并候选者的运动矢量来自于参考帧中相同位置块(Co-located)的右下方和中心处的块,该块为最适合提供良好的时间运动矢量预测值(temporal motion vector predictor,TMVP)。对于双向预测片,针对每个参考图片列表得到TMVP。取决于每个列表的TMVP的可用性,将预测类型设置成双向预测或设置成TMVP可用的列表。所有相关的参考图片索引被设置成等于零。因此,对于单向预测片,只连同等于零的参考图片索引一起得到列表0的TMVP。The motion vector of the temporal merge candidate comes from the block at the lower right and center of the same position block (Co-located) in the reference frame. This block is the most suitable to provide a good temporal motion vector predictor (TMVP). . For bidirectional prediction slices, TMVP is obtained for each reference picture list. Depending on the availability of TMVP for each list, set the prediction type to bi-directional prediction or the list available to TMVP. All related reference picture indexes are set equal to zero. Therefore, for unidirectional prediction slices, only the TMVP of list 0 is obtained along with the reference picture index equal to zero.
当至少一个TMVP可用并且时间合并候选者被添加到列表中时,不执行冗余检查。这使得合并列表构建独立于同位图片,从而提高抗抗误码能力。考虑时间合并候选者将是多余的并因此未包含在合并候选者列表中的情况。在丢失同位图片的情况下,解码器不能得到时间候选者,因此不检查它是否是冗余的。所有后续候选者的索引将受此影响。When at least one TMVP is available and a time merge candidate is added to the list, no redundancy check is performed. This makes the construction of the merged list independent of co-located pictures, thereby improving the ability to resist bit errors. Consider the case where temporal merge candidates will be redundant and therefore not included in the merge candidate list. In the case of missing parity pictures, the decoder cannot get the time candidate, so it does not check whether it is redundant. The indexes of all subsequent candidates will be affected by this.
出于解析鲁棒性原因,合并候选者列表的长度是固定的。在已经添加了空间和时间合并候选者之后,可能出现所述列表还没有固定长度的情况。为了补偿与非长度自适应列表索引信令一起出现的编码效率损失,生成另外的候选者。取决于片的类型,最多可以使用两种候选者来完全填充列表:a.组合双向预测候选者;b.零运动矢量候选者。For parsing robustness reasons, the length of the merge candidate list is fixed. After spatial and temporal merging candidates have been added, it may happen that the list does not yet have a fixed length. To compensate for the coding efficiency loss that occurs with non-length adaptive list index signaling, additional candidates are generated. Depending on the type of slice, up to two candidates can be used to completely populate the list: a. Combined bi-directional prediction candidates; b. Zero motion vector candidates.
在双向预测片中,通过组合一个候选者的参考图片列表0运动数据与另一候选者的列表1运动数据,可基于现有候选者生成另外的候选者。这通过从第一候选者等一个候选者复制Δx 0、Δy 0、Δt 0并且从第二候选者等另一候选者复制Δx 1、Δy 1、Δt 1来完成。预定义不同的组合并在表1中给出。 In the bidirectional prediction slice, by combining the motion data of the reference picture list 0 of one candidate with the motion data of the list 1 of another candidate, another candidate can be generated based on the existing candidate. This is done by copying Δx 0 , Δy 0 , Δt 0 from one candidate such as the first candidate, and Δx 1 , Δy 1 , Δt 1 from another candidate such as the second candidate. Different combinations are predefined and given in Table 1.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2019107931-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2019107931-appb-000002
当添加组合的双向预测候选者之后或对于单向预测片来说列表仍然不完整时,计算零运动矢量候选者以使列表完整。所有零运动矢量候选者对于单向预测片具有一个零位移运动矢量,对于双向预测片具有两个零位移运动矢量。参考索引被设置成等于零,并且对于每个另外的候选者递增一,直到达到参考索引的最大数量。如果是这种情况,并且还有其它候选者缺失,则使用等于零的参考索引来创建这些候选者。对于所有另外的候选者,不执行冗余检查,因为结果显示省略这些检查不会引起编码效率损失。When the combined bi-directional prediction candidate is added or the list is still incomplete for one-way prediction slices, zero motion vector candidates are calculated to make the list complete. All zero motion vector candidates have one zero displacement motion vector for one-way prediction slices and two zero displacement motion vectors for two-way prediction slices. The reference index is set equal to zero and incremented by one for each additional candidate until the maximum number of reference indexes is reached. If this is the case, and there are other candidates missing, these candidates are created using a reference index equal to zero. For all other candidates, no redundancy check is performed, as the results show that omitting these checks does not cause a loss of coding efficiency.
对于以图片间预测模式编码的每个PU,所谓的merge_flag指示使用所述块合并来得到运动数据。merge_idx进一步确定合并列表中提供MCP所需的所有运动数据的候选者。除了此PU层级的信令之外,还在片头中用信号表示合并列表中的候选者的数量。由于默认值为五,因此它表示为与五的差(five_minus_max_num_merge_cand)。这样,五利用0的短码字用信号表示,而仅使用一个候选者则利用4的较长码字用信号表示。至于对合并候选者列表构建过程的影响,整个过程保持不变,但是在列表含有最大数量合并候选者之后,所述过程终止。在初始设计中,合并索引编码的最大值由列表中可用空间和时间候选者的数量给出。当例如只有两个候选者可用时,索引可以高效地编码为一个标志。但是,为了解析合并索引,必须构建整个合并候选者列表以了解候选者的实际数量。假设由于发送错误而导致不可用的相邻块,将不可能再解析合并索引。For each PU encoded in the inter-picture prediction mode, a so-called merge_flag indicates that the block merge is used to obtain motion data. merge_idx further determines the candidates in the merge list that provide all the motion data required by the MCP. In addition to this PU-level signaling, the number of candidates in the merge list is also signaled in the slice header. Since the default value is five, it is expressed as the difference from five (five_minus_max_num_merge_cand). In this way, five are signaled with a short codeword of 0, while only one candidate is signaled with a longer codeword of 4. As for the impact on the merge candidate list construction process, the entire process remains the same, but after the list contains the maximum number of merge candidates, the process terminates. In the initial design, the maximum value of the merge index encoding is given by the number of space and time candidates available in the list. The index can be efficiently encoded as a flag when only two candidates are available, for example. However, in order to parse the merge index, the entire merge candidate list must be constructed to understand the actual number of candidates. Assuming neighboring blocks that are unavailable due to a transmission error, it will no longer be possible to parse the merge index.
HEVC中的块合并概念的关键应用是与跳过模式的组合。在先前的视频编码标准中,使用跳过模式指示这样的块:推测而不是显式地用信号表示运动数据,并且预测残差为零,即,不发送变换系数。在HEVC中,在图片间预测片中的每个CU的开始处,用信号表示skip_flag,这意味着以下方面:a.CU仅含有一个PU(2N×2N分区类型);b.使用合并模式来得到运动数据(merge_flag等于1);c.码流中不存在残差数据。The key application of the block merge concept in HEVC is the combination with the skip mode. In previous video coding standards, a skip mode was used to indicate blocks that speculate rather than explicitly signal motion data, and predict that the residual is zero, that is, no transform coefficients are sent. In HEVC, the skip_flag is signaled at the beginning of each CU in the inter-picture prediction slice, which means the following: a. The CU contains only one PU (2N × 2N partition type); b. Use the merge mode to Get motion data (merge_flag is equal to 1); c. There is no residual data in the code stream.
在HEVC中引入指示区域的并行合并估计层级,其中可以通过检查候选块是否位于所述合并估计区域(MER)中而独立地得到合并候选者列表。相同MER中的候选块不包含在合并候选者列表中。因此,它的运动数据不需要在列表构建时可用。当这个层级是例如32时,那么32×32区域中的所有预测单元可以并行构建合并候选者列表,因为处于相同32×32MER中的所有合并候选者都不插入列表中。如图9所示,存在具有七个CU和十个PU的CTU分区。第一PU0的所有潜在合并候选者都可用,因为它们在第一32×32MER之外。对于第二MER,当MER内的合并估计应该独立时,PU 2-6的合并候选者列表不能包含来自这些PU的运动数据。因此,例如在查看PU5时,没有合并候选者可用且因此不插入合并候选者列表中。在这种情况下,PU5的合并列表仅由时间候选者(如果可用)和零MV候选者组成。为了使编码器能够权衡并行性和编码效率,并行合并估计层级是自适应的,并且在图片参数集中用信号表示为log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2,对应的解码过程则包含以下处理:从图像参数集(Picture Parameter Set,PPS)中获取log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2语法元素,其中该语法元素可取值0,1,2,3和4。由此语法元素导出MERs(即运动估计并行区域)为NxN的区域,其中N=1<<(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2),如log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2为0,则其MER大小为4x4。一个64x64的CTU被划分为M个NxN区域的MERs,M为正整数,例如log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2=0时,CTU被划分成16个16x16的MERs,如图10所示。A parallel merge estimation level indicating regions is introduced in HEVC, where a merge candidate list can be obtained independently by checking whether a candidate block is located in the merge estimation region (MER). Candidate blocks in the same MER are not included in the merge candidate list. Therefore, its motion data does not need to be available during list construction. When this level is, for example, 32, then all prediction units in a 32 × 32 region can build a merge candidate list in parallel, because all merge candidates in the same 32 × 32MER are not inserted into the list. As shown in Figure 9, there are CTU partitions with seven CUs and ten PUs. All potential merge candidates for the first PU0 are available because they are outside the first 32 × 32MER. For the second MER, when the merge estimates within the MER should be independent, the merge candidate list for PU 2-6 cannot contain motion data from these PUs. Therefore, for example when looking at PU5, no merge candidates are available and therefore are not inserted into the merge candidate list. In this case, the merged list of PU5 consists of only temporal candidates (if available) and zero MV candidates. In order to enable the encoder to trade off parallelism and coding efficiency, the parallel merge estimation level is adaptive and is signaled as log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 in the picture parameter set. The corresponding decoding process includes the following processing: From the picture parameter set (Picture PPS) to obtain the log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 syntax element, where the syntax element can take the values 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. From this syntax element, a region of MERs (ie, motion estimation parallel region) is NxN, where N = 1 << (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2). If log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 is 0, the MER size is 4x4. A 64x64 CTU is divided into M NxN region MERs, where M is a positive integer. For example, when log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 = 0, the CTU is divided into 16 16x16 MERs, as shown in FIG.
由于HEVC中仅使用QT划分,以上述MER确定方式得到的MER如果包含多个尺寸小于MER的CU,则MER必然包含多个完整的CU,即尺寸小于MER的多个CU完全包含在一个MER内,不存在一个尺寸小于MER的CU同时包含在多个MER内。此外,在仅使用QT划分时,以上述MER确定方式得到的MER还能够确保如果一个CU与MER相同大小,则CU必然包含在一个MER内。Because only the QT division is used in HEVC, if the MER obtained by the above MER determination method contains multiple CUs smaller than MER, the MER must contain multiple complete CUs, that is, multiple CUs smaller than MER are completely contained in one MER No CU with a size smaller than MER is included in multiple MERs at the same time. In addition, when only QT division is used, the MER obtained by the above MER determination method can also ensure that if a CU is the same size as the MER, the CU must be included in a MER.
在当前PU构建融合运动信息候选列表或运动矢量预测候选列表的过程中,在将空域候选加入融合运动信息候选列表或运动矢量预测候选列表时,在检查其可获得性时,需要额外添加一个检查过程。该检查过程主要包含:In the process of constructing a fusion motion information candidate list or a motion vector prediction candidate list by the current PU, when adding a spatial candidate to the fusion motion information candidate list or the motion vector prediction candidate list, when checking its availability, an additional check needs to be added process. The inspection process mainly includes:
1,确定当前PU所在的当前并行运动估计区域MER,所述当前MER为覆盖当前PU左上角坐标的MER。当前PU的左上角坐标为Pcu=(xP,yP),则当前MER的左上角坐标为Pmer=(xMER,yMER),1. Determine a current parallel motion estimation region MER where the current PU is located, where the current MER is a MER covering the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current PU. The coordinate of the upper left corner of the current PU is Pcu = (xP, yP), then the coordinate of the upper left corner of the current MER is Pmer = (xMER, yMER),
xMER=(xP>>(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2))xMER = (xP >> (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2))
yMER=(yP>>(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2))yMER = (yP >> (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2))
假设某个空域候选的左上角坐标为(xN,yN),可以通过与Assume that the coordinates of the upper left corner of a spatial candidate are (xN, yN).
(xP>>(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2))(xP >> (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2))
==(xN>>(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2))和== (xN >> (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2)) and
(yP>>(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2))(yP >> (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2))
==(yN>>(log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2+2))== (yN >> (log2_parallel_merge_level_minus2 + 2))
来判断当前PU和该空域候选属于同一MER。若该空域候选和当前PU属于同一MER,则该空域候选不可得。否则使用HEVC标准中该空域候选的可获得性判断规则对于该空域候选的可获得性进行进一步判断。To determine that the current PU and the airspace candidate belong to the same MER. If the airspace candidate and the current PU belong to the same MER, the airspace candidate is not available. Otherwise, the availability judgment rules of the airspace candidate in the HEVC standard are used to further judge the availability of the airspace candidate.
2,使用HEVC标准中该空域候选的可获得性判断规则对于该空域候选的可获得性进行判断。2. Use the availability judgment rules of the airspace candidate in the HEVC standard to determine the availability of the airspace candidate.
在QT-MTT划分方式下,如果仍然采用HEVC的方式将CTU划分为NxN的MER,则一个MER可能不能包含多个完整的CU,一个CU也可能不能包含完整个MER,造成语义的混乱。例如CTU以图7方式划分成CU并使用图9方式分为16个MER时,图11中MER0包含a、b、c的一部分,MER1包含c的一部分、e、f的一部分。与当前图像块在同一MER的空域候选被标记为不可获得,减少了可获得的空域候选的数目,则将会降低编码性能。In the QT-MTT division mode, if the CTU is still divided into NxN MERs by using the HEVC method, one MER may not contain multiple complete CUs, and one CU may not contain complete MERs, causing semantic confusion. For example, when the CTU is divided into CUs in the manner of FIG. 7 and 16 MERs in the manner of FIG. 9, in FIG. 11, MER0 includes a part of a, b, and c, and MER1 includes a part of c, e, and f. The spatial domain candidates in the same MER as the current image block are marked as unavailable. If the number of available spatial domain candidates is reduced, the coding performance will be reduced.
为解决该不利的影响,本发明提出一种解决方案,该解决方案在解码过程中,构建融合运动信息候选和运动矢量预测候选列表时,修改MER构造方法,使得当一个MER包含多个CU时,这个MER必然包含多个完整的CU。使用新的构造方法,使得多个CU可以并行进行运动估计或解码。在空域候选与当前图像块在同一MER时,添加预设位置的非相同MER的空域候选。In order to solve this unfavorable effect, the present invention proposes a solution. In the decoding process, when constructing a fusion motion information candidate and a motion vector prediction candidate list, the MER construction method is modified so that when one MER contains multiple CUs This MER must contain multiple complete CUs. Using a new construction method, multiple CUs can perform motion estimation or decoding in parallel. When the airspace candidate is in the same MER as the current image block, a non-identical MER airspace candidate at a preset position is added.
本申请中,空域候选,即spatial candidates。空域候选可以认为一个坐标集合。空域候选中包括多个坐标点,每个坐标点的坐标可以指示一个编码块的位置。一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块。该多个空域临近块与当前编码块之间的位置关系如图8所示,图中该多个空域临近块就是A 0,A 1,B 0,B 1,B 2。另一种实现方式下,当前编码块的空域候选包括更多的坐标点,也就是说,当前编码块的空域候选中的坐标点指示的是该当前编码块的多个空域临近块,还包括位于该当前编码块附近的其他空域块。 In this application, airspace candidates are spatial candidates. Spatial candidates can be considered as a set of coordinates. The spatial domain candidate includes multiple coordinate points, and the coordinates of each coordinate point can indicate the position of a coding block. In an implementation manner, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block. The positional relationship between the multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks and the current coding block is shown in FIG. 8. The multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks are A 0 , A 1 , B 0 , B 1 , B 2 . In another implementation manner, the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block includes more coordinate points, that is, the coordinate points in the spatial domain candidate of the current coding block indicate multiple spatial domain neighboring blocks of the current coding block, and also include Other airspace blocks located near the current coded block.
本申请下述的各种实施例中,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xN,yN)也就是当前空域候选的坐标。(xP,yP)指示当前编码块的坐标,当前编码块就是当前的CU或者PU。(xMER,yMER)指示当前MER左上角的坐标。(xM,yM)指示第二编码块的坐标,或者说,第二编码块对应的坐标是(xM,yM),(xM,yM)也就是新的空域候选的坐标。正如前文所描述的,(xN,yN)具体可以是第一编码块左上角的坐标,(xP,yP)具体可以是当前编码块左上角的坐标,(xMER,yMER)具体可以是当前MER左上角的坐标,那么这时(xM,yM)就是第二编码块左上角的坐标。In various embodiments described below, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first coding block, and (xN, yN) is also the coordinates of the current spatial domain candidate. (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the current CU or PU. (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current MER. (xM, yM) indicates the coordinates of the second coding block, or the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xM, yM), (xM, yM) is the coordinates of the new spatial candidate. As described above, (xN, yN) can be the coordinates of the upper left corner of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) can be the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) can be the upper left corner of the current MER. The coordinates of the corner, then (xM, yM) is the coordinates of the upper left corner of the second coding block.
上述几个块的坐标应当是在同一坐标系下的值,这个值可以是绝对值,也可以是相对于该坐标系中的某一点的相对值,例如相对该坐标系的原点等,本申请不做限制。并且,在同一种实现方式中,上述几个坐标应都取自这些块的相同位置,例如全都是这些块左上角的坐标。另外,上述几个坐标还可以都是上述几个块的其他位置的坐标,例如右上角的坐标,或者右下角的坐标,或者中心点的坐标等等,只要可以指示上述块在一个坐标系中的位置即可,本申请不做限定。因此,第一编码块和当前编码块的位置关系,可以用xN和xP,以及yN和yP之间的数学关系表示。The coordinates of the above several blocks should be the values in the same coordinate system. This value can be an absolute value or a relative value relative to a point in the coordinate system, such as the origin of the coordinate system. No restrictions. And, in the same implementation, the above-mentioned several coordinates should be taken from the same position of these blocks, for example, all of them are the coordinates of the upper left corner of these blocks. In addition, the above coordinates may also be coordinates of other positions of the above blocks, such as the coordinates of the upper right corner, or the coordinates of the lower right corner, or the coordinates of the center point, etc., as long as it can indicate that the above blocks are in a coordinate system The position is sufficient, and this application is not limited. Therefore, the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block can be expressed by a mathematical relationship between xN and xP, and yN and yP.
图12是绘示根据本申请一实施例的视频解码器(例如,图3的视频解码器30)的实例操作的流程图。视频解码器30的一个或多个结构要素可以用于执行图9的技术。该实施例包括:FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example operation of a video decoder (for example, the video decoder 30 of FIG. 3) according to an embodiment of the present application. One or more structural elements of video decoder 30 may be used to perform the technique of FIG. 9. This embodiment includes:
1201、获取当前编码块的划分信息;1201. Obtain division information of a current coding block.
所述编码块的划分信息即所述编码所述的编码树单元的划分信息,该划分信息决定了所述编码树单元将被如何划分成多个编码块,所述当前编码块为所述多个编码块中的一个。编码树划分信息是视频解码器30从接收的码流中获取的,具体可以是视频解码器30中的熵解码单元执行该步骤。所述划分信息可以是当前编码块的四叉树(Quad-Tree,QT)划分深度N以及所述当前编码块的多类型树(Multiple Type Tree,MTT)划分深度M,这种情况下当前编码的块的划分深度是有QT,和MTT两个相互独立的值来标识。而在另一种表示方式中,当前编码块的划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和。此外,当前编码块的划分深度N还可以表示为,N=Dq*2+Db,其中,其中,Dq为编码树单元经过划分所得到的节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2。以图7为例,所述节点是不可以进一步划分的叶节点a、b、c、d、e、f、g、h、i、j、k、l、m、n、o和p。所述节点也可以是CTU的QT-MTT划分过程中还需要进行进一步划分的节点,以图7为例,可以是a和b对应的节点,可以是c和d对应的节点,可以是e、f和g对应的节点,可以是i和j对应的节点,可以是l、m、n、o和p对应的节点,可以是l和m对应的节点,可以是a、b、c、d、e、f和g对应的节点,可以是h、i和j对应的节点。The division information of the coding block is the division information of the coding tree unit that is coded, and the division information determines how the coding tree unit is divided into multiple coding blocks, and the current coding block is the multiple One of the coding blocks. The coding tree partition information is obtained by the video decoder 30 from the received code stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit in the video decoder 30 may perform this step. The partition information may be a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multi-type tree (MTT) partition depth M of the current coding block. In this case, the current coding The division depth of the block is identified by two independent values of QT, and MTT. In another representation manner, the division depth N of the current coding block is the sum of the QT division depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT division depth Dm of the current block. In addition, the division depth N of the current coding block can also be expressed as: N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is the quadtree division depth of the node obtained by dividing the coding tree unit, and Db is the node's Multi-type partition depth. If the node is the MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is obtained by binary tree partitioning, the Db of the node is the The Db of the root node of the node is increased by 1. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the trifurcation method, the Db of the node is the root node of the node. If Db is increased by 1, if the node is a leaf node of MTT and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node. 2. Taking FIG. 7 as an example, the nodes are leaf nodes a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, and p that cannot be further divided. The node may also be a node that needs to be further divided during the QT-MTT division process of the CTU. Taking FIG. 7 as an example, it may be a node corresponding to a and b, a node corresponding to c and d, or e, The nodes corresponding to f and g may be nodes corresponding to i and j, may be nodes corresponding to l, m, n, o, and p, may be nodes corresponding to l and m, and may be a, b, c, d, The nodes corresponding to e, f, and g may be nodes corresponding to h, i, and j.
1203、根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER;1203. Determine a current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information.
可以理解的是,根据不同的需要可以有不同的当前节点的划分深度N的确定方式。It can be understood that, according to different needs, there may be different determination manners of the division depth N of the current node.
本发明实施例提供了如下三种根据所述当前节点的划分深度N确定当前MER所覆盖的区域的方式。The embodiments of the present invention provide the following three manners for determining the area covered by the current MER according to the division depth N of the current node.
方式一:当前CU的划分深度N可以为当前CU的QT depth。如果所述当前节点的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1或当前节点的多类型树划分深度M大于0,则获取所述当前节点的第K层四叉树节点,其中K=min(N,T1),min(a,b)表示取a和b中的较小值;当前运动估计并行区域(简称当前MER)所覆盖的区域为所述第K层四叉树节点所覆盖的区域。其中,第一阈值T1是预先设置的非负整数,例如可以是0,1,2或3等等。Method 1: The division depth N of the current CU may be the QT depth of the current CU. If the partition depth N of the current node is greater than a first threshold T1 or the multi-type tree partition depth M of the current node is greater than 0, a K-th level quadtree node of the current node is obtained, where K = min (N, T1 ), Min (a, b) represents the smaller of a and b; the area covered by the current motion estimation parallel area (referred to as the current MER) is the area covered by the K-th level quadtree node. The first threshold T1 is a non-negative integer set in advance, and may be 0, 1, 2, or 3, for example.
所述第K层四叉树节点的左上角坐标(xK,yK)为:The coordinates of the upper left corner (xK, yK) of the K-level quadtree node are:
xK=xCb-(xCb&((1<<K1)-1))xK = xCb- (xCb & ((1 << K1) -1))
yK=yCb-(yCb&((1<<K1)-1))yK = yCb- (yCb & ((1 << K1) -1))
其中,xCb和yCb表示当前节点的左上角坐标(xCb,yCb),K1=log2(CTUSize)–K。所述第K层四叉树节点的宽和高等于(1<<K1)。Among them, xCb and yCb represent the coordinates of the upper left corner of the current node (xCb, yCb), K1 = log2 (CTUSize) -K. The width and height of the K-level quadtree node are equal to (1 << K1).
可选的,如果当前CU的划分深度小于或等于第一阈值且当前CU的MTT depth为零,则当前CU可以确定为当前MER,此时当前MER中仅包含一个CU。Optionally, if the division depth of the current CU is less than or equal to the first threshold and the MTT depth of the current CU is zero, the current CU may be determined as the current MER, and at this time, the current MER includes only one CU.
其中,有两种确定所述当前节点的划分深度N的方式,一种就是将所述当前节点的划分深度N确定为所述当前节点的QT depth,例如图7中的节点a、b、c、d、e、f、g、h、i、j、k的QT depth为1,l、m、n、o、p的QT depth为2;另一种是将所述当前节点的划分深度N确定为所述当前节点的QT depth与所述当前节点的MTT depth之和,例如图7中的节点k的QT depth为1,MTT depth为0,因此节点k的划分深度N为1;图7中的节点a的QT depth为1,MTT depth为2,因此节点a的划分深度N为3。其中,编码树的根节点的QT depth为0。如果QT编码树中一个节点使用QT划分,则划分得到的子节点的QT depth为该节点的QT depth加1;如果QT中的一个节点不使用QT划分,则这个节点为一个MTT根节点。MTT 的根节点的MTT depth为0;如果MTT编码树上一个节点使用MTT划分,则划分得到的子节点的MTT depth为该节点的MTT depth加1,子节点的QT depth为该节点的QT depth。也就是说,对CTU根节点开始,经过S1次QT划分和S2次MTT划分得到了当前节点,则当前节点的QT depth为S1,MTT depth为S2。以图7为例,MTT depth为1的节点包括:a和b对应的节点(即一个包含a和b所在区域的节点),c和d对应的节点,e、f和g对应的节点,h对应的节点,i和j对应的节点,以及l对应的节点和m对应的节点,MTTdepth为1表示仅需要对CTU进行QT划分后获得的QT叶节点进行一次MTT划分就可以获得的节点;MTTdepth为2的节点包括:a对应的节点,b对应的节点,c对应的节点,d对应的节点,e对应的节点,f对应的节点,g对应的节点,i对应的节点,j对应的节点,MTT depth为2表示需要对CTU进行QT划分后获得的QT叶节点进行二次MTT划分获得的节点。以此类推,还可以有MTT depth为3、4、或5等等的节点(图7中没有MTT depth大于2的节点)。There are two ways to determine the division depth N of the current node. One is to determine the division depth N of the current node as the QT depth of the current node, for example, nodes a, b, and c in FIG. 7. The QT depth of d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k is 1, and the QT depth of l, m, n, o, p is 2; the other is to divide the current node's depth N It is determined as the sum of the QT depth of the current node and the MTT depth of the current node, for example, the QT depth of the node k in FIG. 7 is 1, and the MTT depth is 0, so the partition depth N of the node k is 1; FIG. 7 The node a in the QT depth is 1, and the MTT depth is 2, so the partition depth N of the node a is 3. Among them, the QT depth of the root node of the coding tree is 0. If a node in the QT coding tree is divided by QT, the QT depth of the child nodes obtained by division is the QT depth of the node plus 1; if a node in the QT does not use QT division, this node is a MTT root node. The MTT root depth of the MTT node is 0; if a node on the MTT coding tree is divided by MTT, the MTT depth of the child node obtained is the MTT depth of the node plus 1, and the QT depth of the child node is the QT depth of the node . That is to say, starting from the CTU root node, the current node is obtained after S1 QT partition and S2 MTT partition, then the QT depth of the current node is S1, and the MTT depth is S2. Taking Figure 7 as an example, the MTT node with a depth of 1 includes: nodes corresponding to a and b (that is, a node including the area where a and b are located), nodes corresponding to c and d, nodes corresponding to e, f, and g, h Corresponding nodes, nodes corresponding to i and j, and nodes corresponding to l and nodes corresponding to m. MTTdepth of 1 means that only the QT leaf nodes obtained after QT partitioning of the CTU can be obtained by performing MTT partitioning once; MTTdepth The node for 2 includes: a corresponding node, b corresponding node, c corresponding node, d corresponding node, e corresponding node, f corresponding node, g corresponding node, i corresponding node, and j corresponding node. A MTT depth of 2 indicates a node obtained by performing a second MTT division on a QT leaf node obtained after QT division of a CTU. By analogy, there can also be nodes with an MTT depth of 3, 4, or 5, and so on (there are no nodes with an MTT depth greater than 2 in Figure 7).
方式二:当前CU的划分深度N可以由当前CU的QT depth Dq与当前CU的MTT depth Dm相加得到,即N=Dq+Dm。如果当前编码单元(简称当前CU)的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,则获取当前CU的第一父节点,第一父节点为当前CU的第N-T1层父节点PN(N-T1)。当前运动估计并行区域(简称当前MER)确定为第一父节点所覆盖的区域。Method 2: The division depth N of the current CU can be obtained by adding the QT depth Dq of the current CU and the MTT depth Dm of the current CU, that is, N = Dq + Dm. If the division depth N of the current coding unit (referred to as the current CU) is greater than the first threshold T1, the first parent node of the current CU is obtained, and the first parent node is the N-T1 layer parent node PN (N-T1) of the current CU. . The current motion estimation parallel region (referred to as the current MER) is determined as the region covered by the first parent node.
当前CU的第1层父节点PN(1)即为当前CU所在编码树节点的父节点,当前CU的第2层父节点即为节点PN(1)的父节点,以此类推,即当前CU的第p层父节点PN(p)即为当前CU所在编码树节点的第p-1层父节点PN(p-1)的父节点。例如图2中,a的第1层父节点为由a和b区域构成的节点,a的第2层父节点为由a、b、c、d、e、f、g区域构成的节点。The first layer parent node PN (1) of the current CU is the parent node of the coding tree node where the current CU is located, the second layer parent node of the current CU is the parent node of the node PN (1), and so on, that is, the current CU The p-level parent node PN (p) of the PN is the parent node of the p-1 level parent node PN (p-1) of the coding tree node where the CU is currently located. For example, in FIG. 2, the first-level parent node of a is a node composed of a and b regions, and the second-layer parent node of a is a node composed of a, b, c, d, e, f, and g regions.
作为一种较简化的实现方式,在解析QT-MTT划分时,如果一个节点的划分深度等于第一阈值T1,则保存这个节点信息,包括这个节点的左上角坐标Pnp=(xnp,ynp)、这个节点的宽、这个节点的高中的至少一种;该节点继续划分产生的所有节点的第一父节点均为该节点。如果当前CU由这个节点划分得到,则当前MER确定为这个节点的区域。As a simplified implementation, when analyzing the QT-MTT partition, if the partition depth of a node is equal to the first threshold T1, then the information of this node is saved, including the coordinates of the upper left corner of the node Pnp = (xnp, ynp), At least one of the width of this node and the height of this node; the first parent node of all nodes generated by the node's continued division is this node. If the current CU is divided by this node, the current MER is determined as the area of this node.
可以看出,本发明中多个MER包含的像素数目(即MER的面积)可能不相同,MER的尺寸和位置与编码树划分相关。It can be seen that the number of pixels (that is, the area of the MER) included in multiple MERs in the present invention may be different, and the size and position of the MER are related to the coding tree division.
可选的,如果当前CU的划分深度小于或等于第一阈值,则当前CU可以确定为当前MER,此时当前MER中仅包含一个CU。Optionally, if the division depth of the current CU is less than or equal to the first threshold, the current CU may be determined as the current MER, and at this time, the current MER includes only one CU.
方式三:解析编码树划分信息,得到第一节点;如果第一节点的划分深度N等于第一阈值T1,则第一节点确定为当前MER。当前编码单元为当前MER中的一个编码单元。Method 3: Parse the coding tree partition information to obtain the first node. If the first node's partition depth N is equal to the first threshold T1, the first node is determined to be the current MER. The current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER.
上述编码树例如为基于QT-MTT的编码树,又例如为基于MTT的编码树。The above coding tree is, for example, a coding tree based on QT-MTT, and is also a coding tree based on MTT, for example.
(1)在QT-MTT编码树中,第一节点的划分深度可由以下方式之一确定。(1) In the QT-MTT coding tree, the division depth of the first node can be determined in one of the following ways.
方式一:第一节点的划分深度N可以为第一节点的QT depth。此时,第一节点确定为当前MER的条件中还包含第一节点的MTT depth等于0,即如果第一节点的划分深度N等于第一阈值T1且第一节点的MTT depth等于0,则第一节点确定为当前MER。Method 1: The division depth N of the first node may be the QT depth of the first node. At this time, the condition that the first node determines that the current MER also includes the MTT depth of the first node is equal to 0, that is, if the division depth N of the first node is equal to the first threshold T1 and the MTT depth of the first node is equal to 0, the first A node is determined as the current MER.
(2)在MTT编码树中,第一节点的划分深度N可以由第一节点的QT depth Dq与第一节点的MTT depth Dm相加得到,即N=Dq+Dm。(2) In the MTT coding tree, the division depth N of the first node can be obtained by adding the QT depth Dq of the first node and the MTT depth Dm of the first node, that is, N = Dq + Dm.
当前编码单元为当前MER中的一个编码单元,即当前编码单元是由当前MER对应的第一节点划分得到的MTT叶节点。The current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER, that is, the current coding unit is an MTT leaf node divided by the first node corresponding to the current MER.
第一节点确定为当前MER,即将当前MER的位置和尺寸设置成第一节点的位置和尺寸。The first node is determined as the current MER, that is, the position and size of the current MER are set to the position and size of the first node.
1205、确定第一编码块,所述第一编码块为所述当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外。1205. Determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to a spatial candidate of the current coding block; determining whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER; In a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the information of the current MER, it is determined to be close to the current MER airspace. A second encoding block, wherein the information of the MER includes coordinates of the MER; and a candidate list of spatial motion information is constructed based on the second encoding block, and the second encoding block is located outside the current MER.
具体地,对需要加入到空域运动信息候选列表或运动矢量预测候选列表中的空域候选,获得该空域候选所属MER以及当前CU所属MER,发现该空域候选和当前PU属于同一MER,则该空域候选不可得,应当确定一个新的空域候选,该新的空域候选对应第二编码块。以图8为例,该过程可以检查A0,依次检查A0、B0、A1、B1、B2,当上述的空域临近块中任意有与当前编码块位于相同的MER中,则相应的空域邻近块为不可用,即,所述空域邻近块将不能作为当前编码块的运动信息候选。所述空域运动信息候选列表在当前编码块的编码模式为MERGE模式时,包括参考帧索引,运动矢量,以及参考方向,在当前编码块的编码模式为AMVP模式时,包括运动矢量。具体的,所述步骤1025中的基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,可执行为基于所述第二编码块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。可选地,所述MER范围内的所有编码块使用相同的空域运动信息候选列表。Specifically, for the airspace candidate that needs to be added to the airspace motion information candidate list or the motion vector prediction candidate list, the MER to which the airspace candidate belongs and the MER to which the current CU belongs are found. If the airspace candidate and the current PU belong to the same MER, the airspace candidate If not available, a new airspace candidate should be determined, and the new airspace candidate corresponds to the second coding block. Taking Figure 8 as an example, this process can check A0, and then check A0, B0, A1, B1, and B2 in sequence. When any of the above airspace neighboring blocks is in the same MER as the current coding block, the corresponding airspace neighboring blocks are Not available, that is, the spatially neighboring blocks will not be able to serve as motion information candidates for the current coded block. The airspace motion information candidate list includes a reference frame index, a motion vector, and a reference direction when a coding mode of a current coding block is a MERGE mode, and includes a motion vector when a coding mode of the current coding block is an AMVP mode. Specifically, in step 1025, an airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the second encoding block, and the airspace motion information candidate list may be constructed to be based on motion information of the second encoding block. Optionally, all coded blocks in the MER range use the same spatial domain motion information candidate list.
下面描述几种基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方式。The following describes several ways of determining a second coding block that is close to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the information of the current MER.
其中,当前MER的宽度表示为wMER,当前MER的高度表示为hMER,新的空域候选坐标,也就是第二编码块的坐标,表示为(xM,yM),可以通过以下方法确定:Among them, the width of the current MER is expressed as wMER, the height of the current MER is expressed as hMER, and the new spatial candidate coordinates, that is, the coordinates of the second coding block are expressed as (xM, yM), which can be determined by the following methods:
方法一:若当前空域候选在当前CU的左侧,即xN-xP等于预设的小于零的整数值(例如-1),yN-yP大于等于零,则xM等于xMER-1,yM等于yN。若当前空域候选在当前CU的上方和右上角,即xN-xP大于等于零,yN-yP等于预设的小于零的整数值(例如-1),则xM等于xN,yM等于yMER-1。若当前空域候选在当前CU的左上角,即xN-xP等于预设的小于零的整数值(例如-1),yN-yP等于预设的小于零的整数值(例如-1),则xM等于大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的预设整数值,yM等于大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的预设整数值。Method 1: If the current airspace candidate is on the left side of the current CU, that is, xN-xP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1), and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, then xM is equal to xMER-1 and yM is equal to yN. If the current airspace candidate is above and above the current CU, that is, xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero, and yN-yP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1), then xM is equal to xN and yM is equal to yMER-1. If the current spatial candidate is in the upper left corner of the current CU, that is, xN-xP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1), and yN-yP is equal to a preset integer value less than zero (for example, -1), then xM A preset integer value equal to or greater than xMER-1 and less than xP, and yM is a preset integer value equal to or greater than yMER-1 and less than yP.
方法二:根据MER的左上坐标和MER的宽度wMER和高度hMER来计算得到新的空域候选。对于A 0,yM等于yMER+hMER,xM等于xMER-1。对于A 1,yM等于yMER+hMER-1,xM等于xMER-1。对于B 0,yM等于yMER-1,xM等于xMER+wMER。对于B 1,yM等于yMER-1,xM等于xMER+wMER-1。对于B 2,xM等于xMER-1,yM等于yMER-1。 Method 2: Calculate a new airspace candidate based on the upper left coordinate of MER and the width wMER and height hMER of MER. For A 0 , yM is equal to yMER + hMER and xM is equal to xMER-1. For A 1 , yM is equal to yMER + hMER-1 and xM is equal to xMER-1. For B 0 , yM is equal to yMER-1 and xM is equal to xMER + wMER. For B 1 , yM is equal to yMER-1 and xM is equal to xMER + wMER-1. For B 2 , xM is equal to xMER-1 and yM is equal to yMER-1.
方法三:若xN-xP小于零,则确定新的空域候选坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中M大于等于零,小于等于2*hMER。若xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零,则确定新的空域候选坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),则从预设像素位置(xMER+N,yMER-1)获取位于MER上侧的新的空域候选,其中N为整数,大于等于-1,小于等于2*wMER。Method 3: If xN-xP is less than zero, determine the new spatial candidate coordinates as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where M is greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 2 * hMER. If xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, the new spatial candidate coordinates are determined to be (xMER + N, yMER-1), and then located on the MER from the preset pixel position (xMER + N, yMER-1) A new airspace candidate on the side, where N is an integer, greater than or equal to -1, and less than or equal to 2 * wMER.
方法四:若xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零,则确定新的空域候选坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中M大于等于零,小于等于2*hMER。若yN-yP小于零,则确定新的空域候选坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),则从预设像素位置(xMER+N,yMER-1)获取位于MER上侧的新的空域候选,其中N为整数,大于等于-1,小于等于2*wMER。Method 4: If xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, determine the new spatial candidate coordinates as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where M is greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to 2 * hMER. If yN-yP is less than zero, the new airspace candidate coordinate is determined to be (xMER + N, yMER-1), and a new airspace candidate located on the upper side of MER is obtained from a preset pixel position (xMER + N, yMER-1). , Where N is an integer, greater than or equal to -1, and less than or equal to 2 * wMER.
这样就可以确定出符合要求的,也就是可用的新的空域候选和对应的新的编码块,从而提高了编解码的效率。In this way, the new airspace candidates and corresponding new coding blocks that can meet the requirements can be determined, thereby improving the efficiency of coding and decoding.
1207、根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。1207. Perform prediction and reconstruction on the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
在获得所述空域运动信息候选列表后,还可以根据现有相关技术将其他候选加入到融合运动信息候选列表或运动矢量预测候选列表中,其他候选包括但不仅限于时域候选、零运动信息等。该过程为已有技术,可参照HEVC标准或VTM进行。在当前编码块的候选运动信息列表构建完成之后,获取当前CU的运动信息,此步骤为现有技术,且其获取的时机可以是在构建时域运动信息候选列表之前,当前CU为merge/skip模式时,根据码流中的融合索引(merge index),从融合运动信息候选列表中找到对应的融合运动信息候选作为当前CU的运动信息。当前CU为AMVP模式时,根据码流中的运动矢量预测索引从运动矢量预测候选列表中找到运动矢量预测值,加上码流中提取的运动矢量差异值,得到运动矢量。根据运动信息得到当前块的帧间预测图像,将帧间预测图像与残差图像相加,得到当前块的重建图像;更具体的,解码端:根据运动信息进行运动补偿(motion compensation),得到预测图像。如果当前块存在残差,则将残差信息和预测图像相加,获得当前块的重建图像;如果当前块没有残差,则预测图像为当前块的重建图像。上述过程为现有技术,例如可采用与HEVC或者VTM相同的方法,也可采用其他运动补偿、图像重建方法。After obtaining the airspace motion information candidate list, other candidates can also be added to the fusion motion information candidate list or motion vector prediction candidate list according to the existing related technologies. Other candidates include, but are not limited to, time domain candidates, zero motion information, etc. . This process is prior art and can be performed with reference to the HEVC standard or VTM. After the candidate motion information list of the current coding block is constructed, the motion information of the current CU is obtained. This step is a prior art, and the acquisition timing may be before the time domain motion information candidate list is constructed, and the current CU is merge / skip. In the mode, a corresponding fused motion information candidate is found from the fused motion information candidate list as motion information of the current CU according to a merge index in the code stream. When the current CU is in the AMVP mode, the motion vector prediction value is found from the motion vector prediction candidate list according to the motion vector prediction index in the code stream, and the motion vector difference value extracted from the code stream is used to obtain the motion vector. The inter prediction image of the current block is obtained according to the motion information, and the inter prediction image and the residual image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block. More specifically, the decoding end: perform motion compensation (motion compensation) according to the motion information to obtain Predict the image. If a residual exists in the current block, the residual information and the predicted image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block; if the current block has no residual, the predicted image is a reconstructed image of the current block. The above process is the prior art. For example, the same method as HEVC or VTM may be adopted, and other motion compensation and image reconstruction methods may also be adopted.
本发明的有益效果是:在得到的空域候选不可用的情况下,可以保证得到新的可用的空域候选对应的新的编码块,以及保证同一MER能够包括完整的编码单元,从而在进行编码单元的候选运动信息列表构建过程中能够获取尽可能多的候选运动信息,以提高编码性能。The beneficial effects of the present invention are: when the obtained airspace candidate is unavailable, it can be ensured that a new coding block corresponding to the newly available airspace candidate is obtained, and the same MER can include a complete coding unit, thereby performing a coding unit. In the process of constructing the candidate motion information list, as much candidate motion information as possible can be obtained to improve coding performance.
图13是绘示根据本申请一实施例的视频解码器(例如,图3的视频解码器30)的实例操作的流程图。视频解码器30的一个或多个结构要素可以用于执行图9的技术。该实施例包括:FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example operation of a video decoder (for example, the video decoder 30 of FIG. 3) according to an embodiment of the present application. One or more structural elements of video decoder 30 may be used to perform the technique of FIG. 9. This embodiment includes:
1301、获取编码树单元的划分信息;1301. Obtain division information of a coding tree unit.
所述划分信息可以参考图12介绍的方法所对应的内容。For the division information, reference may be made to content corresponding to the method described in FIG. 12.
1303、根据所述划分信息对所述编码树单元划分得到多个节点,所述多个节点中被继续划分的节点为父节点,未被进一步划分的节点为叶节点;1303. Divide the coding tree unit according to the division information to obtain multiple nodes. The nodes that are further divided among the multiple nodes are parent nodes, and the nodes that are not further divided are leaf nodes.
以图7为例,所述节点是不可以进一步划分的叶节点a、b、c、d、e、f、g、h、i、j、k、l、m、n、o和p。所述节点也可以是CTU的QT-MTT划分过程中还需要进行进一步划分的节点,即父节点,以图7为例,可以是a和b对应的节点,可以是c和d对应的节点,可以是e、f和g对应的节点,可以是i和j对应的节点,可以是l、m、n、o和p对应的节点,可以是l和m对应的节点,可以是a、b、c、d、e、f和g对应的节点,可以是h、i和j对应的节点。Taking FIG. 7 as an example, the nodes are leaf nodes a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, and p that cannot be further divided. The node may also be a node that needs to be further divided during the QT-MTT division of the CTU, that is, a parent node. Taking FIG. 7 as an example, it may be a node corresponding to a and b, or a node corresponding to c and d. It can be the node corresponding to e, f and g, it can be the node corresponding to i and j, it can be the node corresponding to l, m, n, o and p, it can be the node corresponding to l and m, it can be a, b, The nodes corresponding to c, d, e, f, and g may be nodes corresponding to h, i, and j.
1305、确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的当前MER,所述第一节点可以为所述父节点或者叶节点;1305. Determine a first node whose division depth meets a preset condition, and use an area covered by the first node as the current MER of the first node. The first node may be the parent node or a leaf node.
可以理解的是,根据不同的需要可以有不同的当前节点的划分深度N的确定方式。It can be understood that, according to different needs, there may be different determination manners of the division depth N of the current node.
本发明实施例提供了如下额外种根据所述当前节点的划分深度N确定当前MER所覆盖的区域的方式。An embodiment of the present invention provides the following additional manners for determining the area covered by the current MER according to the division depth N of the current node.
方式四:解析编码树划分信息,得到第一节点;如果第一节点的划分深度N等于第二阈值T2减1,且第一节点的划分方式为三叉树划分方式,则第一节点确定为当前MER;如果第一节点的划分深度N等于第二阈值T2,且第一节点的划分方式为二叉树划分方式或四叉树划分,则第一节点确定为当前MER。当前编码单元为当前MER中的一个编码单元。Method 4: Parse the coding tree partition information to obtain the first node. If the first node's partition depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the first node's partition method is a tri-tree partition method, the first node is determined to be the current node. MER; if the division depth N of the first node is equal to the second threshold T2, and the division mode of the first node is binary tree division or quadtree division, the first node is determined to be the current MER. The current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER.
第一节点的划分深度N由第一节点的QT depth Dq、第一节点的二叉树划分深度Db相加得到,N=Dq*2+Db。其中,MTT根节点的Db等于0,MTT节点由二叉树划分方式划分时子节点的Db加1,MTT节点由三叉树划分方式划分且子节点为三叉树划分的中间节点时,子节点的Db加1,MTT节点由三叉树划分方式划分且子节点不为三叉树划分的中间节点时,子节点的Db加2。第二阈值T2为偶数,例如X=2、4或6、8等。The division depth N of the first node is obtained by adding the QT depth Dq of the first node and the binary tree division depth Db of the first node, N = Dq * 2 + Db. Among them, the Db of the MTT root node is equal to 0, and the Db of the child node is increased by 1 when the MTT node is divided by the binary tree division method. 1. When the MTT node is divided by the tri-tree division method and the child node is not an intermediate node divided by the tri-tree, the Db of the child node is increased by 2. The second threshold value T2 is an even number, such as X = 2, 4 or 6, 8 and the like.
可选的,如果第一节点的划分深度N小于或等于第二阈值T2,且第一节点不再划分(即第一节点为CU),则第一节点确定为当前MER。此时当前MER仅包含一个CU。Optionally, if the division depth N of the first node is less than or equal to the second threshold T2, and the first node is no longer divided (that is, the first node is CU), the first node is determined to be the current MER. At this time, the current MER contains only one CU.
方式五:解析编码树划分信息,得到第一节点;如果第一节点的划分深度N等于第三阈值T3减1,且第一节点的划分方式为三叉树划分方式或四叉树划分方式,则第一节点确定为当前MER;如果第一节点的划分深度N等于第三阈值T3,且第一节点的划分方式为二叉树划分方式,则第一节点确定为当前MER。当前编码单元为当前MER中的一个编码单元。Method 5: Parse the coding tree partition information to obtain the first node. If the partition depth N of the first node is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the partition method of the first node is a tri-tree partition or a quad-tree partition, then The first node is determined to be the current MER; if the partition depth N of the first node is equal to the third threshold T3, and the first node is partitioned into a binary tree, the first node is determined to be the current MER. The current coding unit is a coding unit in the current MER.
第一节点的划分深度N由第一节点的QT depth Dq、第一节点的二叉树划分深度Db相加得到,N=Dq*2+Db。其中,MTT根节点的Db等于0,MTT节点由二叉树划分方式划分时子节点的Db加1,MTT节点由三叉树划分方式划分且子节点为三叉树划分的中间节点时,子节点的Db加1,MTT节点由三叉树划分方式划分且子节点不为三叉树划分的中间节点时,子节点的Db加2。The division depth N of the first node is obtained by adding the QT depth Dq of the first node and the binary tree division depth Db of the first node, N = Dq * 2 + Db. Among them, the Db of the MTT root node is equal to 0, and the Db of the child node is increased by 1 when the MTT node is divided by the binary tree division method. 1. When the MTT node is divided by the tri-tree division method and the child node is not an intermediate node divided by the tri-tree, the Db of the child node is increased by 2.
第三阈值T3为预设的正整数,例如X=3或5。The third threshold T3 is a preset positive integer, such as X = 3 or 5.
可选的,如果第一节点的划分深度N小于或等于第三阈值T3,且第一节点不再划分(即第一节点为CU),则第一节点确定为当前MER。此时当前MER仅包含一个CU。Optionally, if the division depth N of the first node is less than or equal to the third threshold T3, and the first node is no longer divided (that is, the first node is CU), the first node is determined to be the current MER. At this time, the current MER contains only one CU.
1307、确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;1307. Determine whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER; and in a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the first coding block and the first MER, The positional relationship between the current coding block and the current MER information determines a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace, wherein the MER information includes the coordinates of the MER; based on the second coding block Constructing an airspace motion information candidate list, where the second coding block is located outside the current MER;
该该步骤1307与步骤1205相同,详情请参步骤1205.This step 1307 is the same as step 1205, please refer to step 1205 for details.
1309、根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。1309. Perform prediction and reconstruction on the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
在获得所述空域运动信息候选列表后,还可以根据现有相关技术将其他候选加入到融合运动信息候选列表或运动矢量预测候选列表中,其他候选包括但不仅限于时域候选、零运动信息等。该过程为已有技术,可参照HEVC标准或VTM进行。在当前编码块的候选运动信息列表构建完成之后,获取当前CU的运动信息,此步骤为现有技术,且其获取的时机可以是在构建时域运动信息候选列表之前,当前CU为merge/skip模式时,根据码流中的融合索引(merge index),从融合运动信息候选列表中找到对应的融合运动信息候选作为当前CU的运动信息。当前CU为AMVP模式时,根据码流中的运动矢量预测索引从运动矢量预测候选列表中找到运动矢量预测值,加上码流中提取的运动矢量差异值,得到运动矢量。根据运动信息得到当前块的帧间预测图像,将帧间预测图像与残差图像相加,得到当前块的重建图像;更具体的,解码端:根据运动信息进行运动补偿(motion compensation),得到预测图像。如果当前块存在残差,则将残差信息和预测图像相加,获得当前块的重建图像;如果当前块没有残差,则预测图像为当前块的重建图像。上述过程为现有技术,例如可采用与HEVC或者VTM相同的方法,也可采用其他运动补偿、图像重建方法。After obtaining the airspace motion information candidate list, other candidates can also be added to the fusion motion information candidate list or motion vector prediction candidate list according to the existing related technologies. Other candidates include, but are not limited to, time domain candidates, zero motion information, etc. . This process is prior art and can be performed with reference to the HEVC standard or VTM. After the candidate motion information list of the current coding block is constructed, the motion information of the current CU is obtained. This step is a prior art, and the acquisition timing may be before the time domain motion information candidate list is constructed, and the current CU is merge / skip. In the mode, a corresponding fused motion information candidate is found from the fused motion information candidate list as motion information of the current CU according to a merge index in the code stream. When the current CU is in the AMVP mode, the motion vector prediction value is found from the motion vector prediction candidate list according to the motion vector prediction index in the code stream, and the motion vector difference value extracted from the code stream is used to obtain the motion vector. The inter prediction image of the current block is obtained according to the motion information, and the inter prediction image and the residual image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block. More specifically, the decoding end: perform motion compensation (motion compensation) according to the motion information to obtain Predict the image. If a residual exists in the current block, the residual information and the predicted image are added to obtain a reconstructed image of the current block; if the current block has no residual, the predicted image is a reconstructed image of the current block. The above process is the prior art. For example, the same method as HEVC or VTM may be adopted, and other motion compensation and image reconstruction methods may also be adopted.
该该步骤1309与步骤1207相同,详情请参步骤1207.This step 1309 is the same as step 1207, please refer to step 1207 for details.
本发明另一实施例还提供了一种解码装置1400,如图14所示,所述解码装置1400包括:Another embodiment of the present invention further provides a decoding device 1400. As shown in FIG. 14, the decoding device 1400 includes:
解析模块1401,用于获取当前编码块的划分信息;A parsing module 1401, configured to obtain division information of a current coding block;
MER确定模块1403,用于根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER;A MER determination module 1403, configured to determine a current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information;
空域运动信息候选列表构建模块1405,用于确定第一编码块,所述第一编码块为所述当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;The spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module 1405 is configured to determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and determining the current coding block and the first coding block. Whether the block belongs to the same MER; and in a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER To determine a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace, wherein the information of the MER includes the coordinates of the MER; and constructing a candidate list of spatial motion information based on the second coding block, the second coding block being located at Outside the current MER;
重建模块1407,用于根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码单元进行预测及重建。A reconstruction module 1407 is configured to predict and reconstruct the current coding unit according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
其中,解码装置1400的具体实现可以参考图12所描述的方法,此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation of the decoding device 1400, reference may be made to the method described in FIG. 12, and details are not described herein again.
在一种实现方式下,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动 信息候选列表构建模块用于:在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In an implementation manner, the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block. In the aspect of determining the second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace The motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: when xN-xP is less than zero, determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the The coordinates of the current MER, where M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER; in a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, determining the second encoding The coordinates corresponding to the block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to the width of the MER. double.
在一种实现方式下,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In an implementation manner, the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block. In the aspect of determining the second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace The motion information candidate list building module is configured to determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M) when xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, where (( xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, M is an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER; and when yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined to be the same as the second The coordinates corresponding to the coding block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to the width of the MER Twice.
在一种实现方式下,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。In an implementation manner, the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the MER, and the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. The positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the information of the current MER, determine an aspect of a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace. The airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: : In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER); in the first encoding block In the case of being adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1); between the first encoding block and the current encoding When the upper right corners of the blocks are adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1); when the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block , The coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1); in the first encoding block When the upper left corner of the current coding block is adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1); where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, and hMER indicates The MER is high, and wMER indicates the width of the MER.
在一种实现方式下,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。In an implementation manner, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER , In terms of determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace motion information The candidate list building module is used for: when xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yN); and when xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero When yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xN, yMER-1); when xN-xP and yN-yP are both integers less than zero, all The coordinate value range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is an integer greater than or equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
在一种实施方式中,所述解析模块用于:获取当前编码块的四叉树(Quad-Tree,QT)划分深度N以及所述当前编码块的多类型树(Multiple Type Tree,MTT)划分深度M,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过M+N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个;所述MER确定模块,用于,在所述四叉树划分深度N大于第一阈值T1时,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数,或者在所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M大于0时,则将由所述编码树单元划分得到的划分深度为K的第一子单元所述覆盖的区域作为所述MER,其中,K=min(N,T1),min(a,b)表示取a和b中的较小值,所述第一子单元包含所述当前编码单元。In one embodiment, the parsing module is configured to obtain a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multiple type tree (MTT) partition of the current coding block. A depth M, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided M + N times; the MER determination module is configured to: A threshold T1, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer, or when the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is greater than 0, the partition depth obtained by partitioning the coding tree unit is K first The area covered by the subunit is used as the MER, where K = min (N, T1), min (a, b) means taking the smaller value of a and b, and the first subunit contains the current Coding unit.
在另一种实施方式中,所述MER确定模块,还用于在所述四叉树划分深度N小于或者等于第一阈值T1时,或者所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M等于0,则所述当前编码块即为所述当前MER。In another implementation manner, the MER determination module is further configured to: when the quad-tree partition depth N is less than or equal to a first threshold T1, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, Then the current coding block is the current MER.
在另一种实施方式中,所述解析模块,用于获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,所述节点若不再继续划分则称之为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;所述MER确定模块用于,在所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1时,则获取所述当前编码块的第N-T1层父节点,以所述第N-T1层父节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中,所述父节点为包含所述当前编码块所在节点的且划分深度小于N的节点,与所述当前编码块所在节点紧邻的父节点为所述当前编码块的第1层父节点。In another implementation manner, the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and an MTT partition depth Dm of the current block. In sum, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein a subunit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit Itself is the root node of the node, the node is called a leaf node if it does not continue to divide, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times; The MER determination module is configured to: when the division depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtain the N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and use the N-T1 layer parent node The area covered is the current MER, wherein the parent node is a node containing the node where the current coding block is located and the division depth is less than N, and the parent node immediately adjacent to the node where the current coding block is located is the current encoding. Block 1 Parent node.
在另一种实施方式中,所述解析模块,用于获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,不再继续划分的节点为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;所述MER确定模块用于,在所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1时,则将所述编码树单元中划分深度为T1的节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数。In another implementation manner, the parsing module is configured to obtain a partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is a QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and an MTT partition depth Dm of the current block. In sum, the current coding block is one of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the coding tree unit is divided N times, wherein a subunit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit Itself is the root node of the node, the node that is no longer divided is a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times; the MER determination module is configured to: When the partition depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, the area covered by the node with the partition depth T1 in the coding tree unit is taken as the current MER, where T1 is a preset non-zero Positive integer.
在另一种实施方式中,空域运动信息候选列表构建模块,用于判断所述空域邻近块与所述当前编码块 是否位于同于MER中,若是,则将所述空域相邻块设置为不可用,若否,则基于所述空域相邻块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。In another implementation manner, a spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module is configured to determine whether the spatial domain neighboring block and the current coding block are located in the same MER, and if so, set the spatial domain neighboring block to be unavailable. Yes, if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring blocks.
本发明另一实施例还提供了一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码装置1500,如图15所示,所述解码装置1500包括:Another embodiment of the present invention further provides a decoding device 1500 based on a motion estimation assessment region (MER). As shown in FIG. 15, the decoding device 1500 includes:
解析模块1501,用于获取编码树单元的划分信息;A parsing module 1501, configured to obtain division information of a coding tree unit;
划分模块1503,用于根据所述划分信息对所述编码树单元划分得到多个节点,所述多个节点中被继续划分的节点为父节点,未被进一步划分的节点为叶节点;A division module 1503, configured to divide the coding tree unit to obtain multiple nodes according to the division information, among the multiple nodes, a node that is continuously divided is a parent node, and a node that is not further divided is a leaf node;
MER确定模块1505,用于确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的当前MER,所述第一节点可以为所述父节点或者叶节点;The MER determination module 1505 is configured to determine a first node whose division depth meets a preset condition, and use an area covered by the first node as the current MER of the first node. The first node may be the parent node or Leaf node
空域运动信息候选列表构建模块1507,用于确定第一编码块,其中,所述第一编码块为当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块,所述当前编码块为所述第一节点或者所述第一节点经过进一步划分得到的叶子节点;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;The spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module 1507 is configured to determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the first node or A leaf node obtained by further dividing the first node; determining whether the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER; and in a case where the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER Determining a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, wherein the information of the MER includes the Coordinates of the MER; constructing a spatial motion information candidate list based on the second coding block, the second coding block being located outside the current MER;
重建模块1509,用于根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。A reconstruction module 1509 is configured to predict and reconstruct the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
其中,解码装置1500的具体实现可以参考图13所描述的方法,此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation of the decoding device 1500, reference may be made to the method described in FIG. 13, and details are not described herein again.
在一种实现方式下,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In an implementation manner, the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block. In the aspect of determining the second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace The motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: when xN-xP is less than zero, determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the The coordinates of the current MER, where M is an integer, M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER; in a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, determining the second encoding The coordinates corresponding to the block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to the width of the MER. double.
在一种实现方式下,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In an implementation manner, the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, and (xP, yP) indicates the current encoding block. In the aspect of determining the second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace The motion information candidate list building module is configured to determine the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block as (xMER-1, yMER + M) when xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, where (( xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, M is an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER; and when yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined to be the same as the second The coordinates corresponding to the coding block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to the width of the MER Twice.
在一种实现方式下,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。In an implementation manner, the information of the current MER further includes the width and height of the MER, and the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. The positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the information of the current MER, determine an aspect of a second coding block that is close to the current MER airspace. The airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to: : In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER); in the first encoding block In the case of being adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1); between the first encoding block and the current encoding When the upper right corners of the blocks are adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1); when the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block , The coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1); in the first encoding block When the upper left corner of the current coding block is adjacent, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1); where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, and hMER indicates The MER is high, and wMER indicates the width of the MER.
在一种实现方式下,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。In an implementation manner, (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER , In terms of determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace motion information The candidate list building module is used for: when xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER-1, yN); and when xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero When yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xN, yMER-1); when xN-xP and yN-yP are both integers less than zero, all The coordinate value range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is an integer greater than or equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
在一实施方式中,所述划分深度包括独立的四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth),以及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth),所述MER确定模块用于确定QT depth等于所述预设条件且所述MTT Depth深度等于0的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。In one embodiment, the division depth includes independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth). The MER determination module is configured to: It is determined that the first node whose QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT depth is equal to 0, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
在另一实施方式中,所述划分深度为四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth)及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth)之和,所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度等于所述预设条件且被进一步划分为多个MTT叶节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述当前编码块为所述多个MTT叶节点中的一个节点.In another embodiment, the division depth is a sum of a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), and the MER determination module is configured to: Determining a first node having a partition depth equal to the preset condition and further divided into a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, and using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is the One of multiple MTT leaf nodes.
在另一实施方式中,所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度N等于第二阈值T2减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第二阈值T2,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T2为大于1的正整数。In another embodiment, the partition depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is the quadtree partition depth of the node, and Db is the multi-type partition depth of the node. If the node is MTT Root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if When a node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree partition method, Db of the node is Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is MTT When the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2; the MER determination module is used to determine the division The depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the first node is divided into three branches, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node, or the partition depth N is determined to be equal to the second Threshold T2, and the division mode is binary tree division mode or In the first node of the quadtree partitioning method, the area covered by the first node is taken as the MER of the first node, where T2 is a positive integer greater than 1.
在另一实施方式中,所述MER确定模块进一步用于确定划分深度N小于或者等于第二阈值T2减1且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。In another embodiment, the MER determination module is further configured to determine that the partition depth N is less than or equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1 and is the first node of the leaf node, and uses the area covered by the first node as The MER of the first node.
在另一实施方式中,所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度N等于第三阈值T3减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第三阈值T3,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T3为大于1的正整数。In another embodiment, the partition depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, where Dq is the quadtree partition depth of the node, and Db is the multi-type partition depth of the node. If the node is MTT Root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0, if the node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if When a node is a leaf node of MTT, and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree partition method, Db of the node is Db of the root node of the node plus 1, if the node is MTT When the leaf node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2; the MER determination module is used to determine the division The depth N is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the first node is divided into a tri-tree or a quad-tree, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node, or the division depth is determined. N is equal to the third threshold T3, and the division manner Is the first node of the binary tree partitioning method, and uses the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, where T3 is a positive integer greater than 1.
在另一实施方式中,所述MER确定模块用于确定划分深度N小于或者等于第三阈值T3且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。In another implementation manner, the MER determination module is configured to determine a first node whose division depth N is less than or equal to a third threshold T3 and is the leaf node, and use an area covered by the first node as the first node MER.
在另一实施方式中,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块,用于判断所述空域邻近块与所述当前编码块是否位于同于MER中,若是,则将所述空域相邻块设置为不可用,若否,则基于所述空域相邻块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。In another embodiment, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to determine whether the airspace neighboring block and the current coding block are located in the same MER, and if so, set the airspace neighboring block as Not available, if not, the airspace motion information candidate list is constructed based on the motion information of the airspace neighboring blocks.
本发明实施例还提供了一种视频解码器,包括用于执行上述任一所述的方法的执行电路。An embodiment of the present invention further provides a video decoder, which includes an execution circuit for performing any one of the foregoing methods.
本发明实施例还提供了一种视频解码器,包括:至少一个处理器;和与所述至少一个处理器耦合的非易失性计算机可读存储介质,所述非易失性计算机可读存储介质存储有可被所述至少一个处理器执行的计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被所述至少一个处理器执行时,使得所述视频解码器用于执行上一任一所述的方法。An embodiment of the present invention further provides a video decoder, including: at least one processor; and a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium coupled to the at least one processor, the non-volatile computer-readable storage The medium stores a computer program executable by the at least one processor, and when the computer program is executed by the at least one processor, causes the video decoder to perform any one of the methods described above.
本发明实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储可被处理器执行的计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被所述至少一个处理器执行时,执行上述任一所述的方法。An embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program executable by a processor, and when the computer program is executed by the at least one processor, performing any one of the foregoing methods. .
本发明实施例还提供了一种计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被执行时,执行上述任一所述的方法。An embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, any one of the foregoing methods is performed.
在一个或一个以上实例中,所描述功能可以硬件、软件、固件或其任何组合来实施。如果在软件中实施,那么所述功能可作为一或多个指令或代码在计算机可读介质上存储或传输,并且由基于硬件的处理单元执行。计算机可读介质可以包含计算机可读存储介质,其对应于例如数据存储介质或通信介质的有形介质,通信介质例如根据通信协议包含有助于将计算机程序从一处传送到另一处的任何介质。以此方式,计算机可读介质通常可对应于(1)非暂时性的有形计算机可读存储介质,或(2)通信介质,例如,信号或载波。数据存储介质可以是可由一或多个计算机或一或多个处理器存取以检索用于实施本发明中描述的技术的指令、代码和/或数据结构的任何可用介质。计算机程序产品可包含计算机可读介质。In one or more examples, the functions described may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions may be stored or transmitted as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium and executed by a hardware-based processing unit. A computer-readable medium may include a computer-readable storage medium, which corresponds to a tangible medium such as a data storage medium or a communication medium including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another, according to a communication protocol, for example. . In this manner, computer-readable media generally may correspond to (1) tangible computer-readable storage media that is non-transitory, or (2) a communication medium such as a signal or carrier wave. A data storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, codes, and / or data structures used to implement the techniques described in this disclosure. The computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
借助于实例而非限制,此类计算机可读存储介质可包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其它光盘存储器、磁盘存储器或其它磁性存储设备、闪存,或可用以存储呈指令或数据结构形式的所需程序代码且可由计算机存取的任何其它介质。并且,任何连接可适当地称为计算机可读介质。举例来说,如果使用同轴电缆、光纤缆线、双绞线、数字订户线(digital subscriber line,DSL)或例如红外线、无线电及微波等无线技术从网站、服务器或其它远程源传输指令,则同轴电缆、光纤缆线、双绞线、DSL或例如红外线、无线电及微波等无线技术包含在介质的定义中。但是,应理解,所述计算机可读存储介质及数据存储介质并不包括连接、载波、信号或其它暂时性介质,而是实际上针对于非暂时性有形存储介质。如本文中所使用,磁盘和光盘包含压缩光盘(compact disc,CD)、激光光盘、光学光盘、数字多功能光盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)、软性磁盘及蓝光光盘,其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据,而光盘用激光以光学方式再现数据。以上各项的组合也应包含于计算机可读介质的范围内。By way of example and not limitation, such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures Any other media that requires program code and is accessible by the computer. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source, then Coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of the medium. It should be understood, however, that the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media. As used herein, magnetic disks and compact discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), flexible discs and Blu-ray discs, where the discs are usually magnetic The data is reproduced, while the optical disk uses a laser to reproduce the data optically. Combinations of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
指令可以由一或多个处理器执行,所述一或多个处理器例如是一或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、通用微处理器、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑阵列(field programmable logic arrays,FPGA)或其它等效的集成或离散逻辑电路。因此,如本文中所使用的术语“处理器”可指代上述结构或适用于实施本文中所描述的技术的任何其它结构中的任一者。另外,在一些方面中,本文中所描述的功能性可在用于编码和解码的专用硬件和/或软件模块内提供,或并入在合成编解码器中。并且,所述技术可完全实施于一或多个电路或逻辑元件中。The instructions may be executed by one or more processors, such as one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), general purpose microprocessors, application specific integrated circuits , ASIC), field programmable logic array (field programmable logic arrays, FPGA) or other equivalent integrated or discrete logic circuits. Accordingly, the term "processor" as used herein may refer to any of the above-described structures or any other structure suitable for implementing the techniques described herein. Additionally, in some aspects, the functionality described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and / or software modules for encoding and decoding, or incorporated in a composite codec. Also, the techniques could be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
本公开的技术可以在包含无线手持机、集成电路(integrated circuit,IC)或IC集合(例如,芯片组)的多种设备或装置中实施。本公开描述各种组件、模块或单元是为了强调用于执行所揭示的技术的设备的功能方面,但未必需要通过不同硬件单元实现。确切地,如上文所描述,各种单元可结合合适的软件和/或固件组合在编解码器硬件单元中,或由互操作硬件单元的集合来提供,所述硬件单元包含如上文所描述的一或多个处理器。The techniques of this disclosure may be implemented in a variety of devices or devices that include a wireless handset, an integrated circuit (IC), or a collection of ICs (eg, a chipset). The present disclosure describes various components, modules, or units to emphasize functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed techniques, but does not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units. Specifically, as described above, the various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and / or firmware, or provided by a collection of interoperable hardware units, which include as described above One or more processors.

Claims (34)

  1. 一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码方法,其包括:A decoding method based on Motion Estimated Region (MER) includes:
    获取当前编码块的划分信息;Obtain the partition information of the current coding block;
    根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER;Determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information;
    确定第一编码块,所述第一编码块为所述当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块;Determining a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block;
    确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;Determining whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER;
    在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;In a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, it is determined that A second coding block adjacent to the MER space, wherein the information of the MER includes coordinates of the MER;
    基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;Constructing a spatial motion information candidate list based on the second coding block, where the second coding block is located outside the current MER;
    根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。Predicting and reconstructing the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating coordinates of the current coding block, determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on a positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, include:
    在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;When xN-xP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and M is an integer, And M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER;
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER. Coordinates, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating coordinates of the current coding block, determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on a positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, include:
    在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;In a case where xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER M, an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER;
    在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。When yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and N is an integer And N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  4. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the MER, and the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. And determining the second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block and the information of the current MER includes:
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper right corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1);
    其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。Among them, (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, hMER indicates the height of the MER, and wMER indicates the width of the MER.
  5. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) indicates The coordinates of the current MER, and determining a second encoding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the position relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the information of the current MER, include:
    在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);When xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yN);
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xN, yMER-1);
    在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。When both xN-xP and yN-yP are integers smaller than zero, the coordinate range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is greater than An integer equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
  6. 如权利要求1至5任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:
    所述获取当前编码块的划分信息包括:The obtaining the division information of the current encoding block includes:
    获取当前编码块的四叉树(Quad-Tree,QT)划分深度N以及所述当前编码块的多类型树(Multiple Type Tree,MTT)划分深度M,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过M+N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个;Obtain a quad-tree (QT) partition depth N of the current coding block and a multi-type tree (MTT) partition depth M of the current coding block, where the current coding block is a coding tree unit passing M One of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after + N divisions;
    所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER包括:The determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information includes:
    若所述四叉树划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数,或者所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M大于0,则将由所述编码树单元划分得到的划分深度为K的第一子单元所述覆盖的区域作为所述MER,其中,K=min(N,T1),min(a,b)表示取a和b中的较小值,所述第一子单元包含所述当前编码单元。If the quadtree partition depth N is greater than a first threshold T1, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer, or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is greater than 0, then the coding tree unit will be obtained by partitioning The area covered by the first sub-unit with a division depth of K is used as the MER, where K = min (N, T1), min (a, b) means taking the smaller of a and b, where The first subunit contains the current coding unit.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于:所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER还包括:若所述四叉树划分深度N小于或者等于第一阈值T1,或者所述当前编码单元的多类型划分深度M等于0,则所述当前编码块即为所述当前MER。The method according to claim 6, wherein the determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the partition information further comprises: if the quad-tree partition depth N is less than or equal to a first threshold T1, Or the multi-type partition depth M of the current coding unit is equal to 0, then the current coding block is the current MER.
  8. 如权利要求1至5任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:
    所述获取当前编码块的划分信息包括:The obtaining the division information of the current encoding block includes:
    获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,所述节点若不再继续划分则称之为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;Obtain the partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is the sum of the QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT partition depth Dm of the current block, and the current coding block is a coding tree unit that has been passed N times. One of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the division, wherein a subunit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is called a node, and the coding tree unit itself is a root node of the node, and if the node is no longer The further division is called a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times;
    所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER包括:The determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information includes:
    若所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,则获取所述当前编码块的第N-T1层父节点,以所述第N-T1层父节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中,所述父节点为包含所述当前编码块所在节点的且划分深度小于N的节点,与所述当前编码块所在节点紧邻的父节点为所述当前编码块的第1层父节点。If the division depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, obtaining an N-T1 layer parent node of the current coding block, and using the area covered by the N-T1 layer parent node as the current MER, wherein the parent node is a node including the node where the current coding block is located and the division depth is less than N, and the parent node immediately adjacent to the node where the current coding block is located is the first layer parent node of the current coding block .
  9. 如权利要求1至5任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:
    所述获取当前编码块的划分信息包括:The obtaining the division information of the current encoding block includes:
    获取当前编码块的划分深度N,所述划分深度N为所述当前编码块的QT划分深度Dq与所述当前块的MTT划分深度Dm之和,所述当前编码块为编码树单元经过N次划分后所获得的多个编码块中的一个,其中,所述编码树单元每一次划分所得到的子单元称为节点,编码树单元本身为所述节点的根节点,不再继续划分的节点为叶节点,所述当前编码块为所述编码单元经过N次划分后的多个叶节点中的一个;Obtain the partition depth N of the current coding block, where the partition depth N is the sum of the QT partition depth Dq of the current coding block and the MTT partition depth Dm of the current block, and the current coding block is a coding tree unit that has been passed N times. One of a plurality of coding blocks obtained after the division, wherein a sub-unit obtained by each division of the coding tree unit is referred to as a node, and the coding tree unit itself is a root node of the node, and a node that is no longer to be divided Is a leaf node, and the current coding block is one of a plurality of leaf nodes after the coding unit is divided N times;
    所述根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER包括:The determining the current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information includes:
    若所述当前编码块的划分深度N大于第一阈值T1,则将所述编码树单元中划分深度为T1的节点所覆盖的区域作为所述当前MER,其中T1是预先设置的非零正整数。If the partition depth N of the current coding block is greater than a first threshold T1, the area covered by the node with the partition depth T1 in the coding tree unit is taken as the current MER, where T1 is a preset non-zero positive integer .
  10. 如权利要求1至9任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于:所述基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the constructing a candidate list of spatial motion information based on the second coding block comprises:
    基于所述第二编码块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。Constructing the airspace motion information candidate list based on the motion information of the second coding block.
  11. 一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码方法,其包括:A decoding method based on Motion Estimated Region (MER) includes:
    获取编码树单元的划分信息;Obtain the division information of the coding tree unit;
    根据所述划分信息对所述编码树单元划分得到多个节点,所述多个节点中被继续划分的节点为父节点,未被进一步划分的节点为叶节点;Dividing the coding tree unit according to the division information to obtain multiple nodes, among the multiple nodes, a node that is continuously divided is a parent node, and a node that is not further divided is a leaf node;
    确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的当前MER,所述第一节点可以为所述父节点或者叶节点;Determining a first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using an area covered by the first node as the current MER of the first node, the first node may be the parent node or a leaf node;
    确定第一编码块,其中,所述第一编码块为当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块,所述当前编码块为所述第一节点或者所述第一节点经过进一步划分得到的叶子节点;Determining a first coding block, wherein the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to a spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the first node or a leaf obtained by the first node through further division node;
    确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;Determining whether the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER;
    在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;In a case where the current coding block and the first coding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, it is determined that A second coding block adjacent to the MER space, wherein the information of the MER includes coordinates of the MER;
    基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;Constructing a spatial motion information candidate list based on the second coding block, where the second coding block is located outside the current MER;
    根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。Predicting and reconstructing the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating coordinates of the current coding block, determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on a positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, include:
    在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;When xN-xP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and M is an integer, And M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER;
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER. Coordinates, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  13. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating coordinates of the current coding block, determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on a positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, include:
    在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;In a case where xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER M, an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER;
    在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。When yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and N is an integer And N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  14. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the MER, and the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. And determining the second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the position relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block and the information of the current MER includes:
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper right corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1);
    其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。Among them, (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, hMER indicates the height of the MER, and wMER indicates the width of the MER.
  15. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) indicates The coordinates of the current MER, and determining a second encoding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the position relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the information of the current MER, include:
    在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);When xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yN);
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xN, yMER-1);
    在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。When both xN-xP and yN-yP are integers smaller than zero, the coordinate range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is greater than An integer equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
  16. 如权利要求11到15任一所述的方法,其特征在于:所述划分深度包括独立的四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth),以及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth),所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定QT depth等于所述预设条件且所述MTT Depth深度等于0的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the division depth comprises an independent quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth), and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth), the determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that QT depth is equal to the preset condition and the MTT The first node with a Depth depth equal to 0, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
  17. 如权利要求11到15任一所述的方法,其特征在于:所述划分深度为四叉树划分深度(QUAD-Tree Depth,QT depth)及多类型划分深度(Multi-Type Tree,MTT Depth)之和,所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定划分深度等于所述预设条件且被进一步划分为多个MTT叶节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述当前编码块为所述多个MTT叶节点中的一个节点.The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the division depth is a quad-tree division depth (QUAD-Tree Depth, QT depth) and a multi-type division depth (Multi-Type Tree, MTT Depth) In sum, determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth is equal to the preset condition and is further divided into A first node of a plurality of MTT leaf nodes, using an area covered by the first node as a MER of the first node, wherein the current coding block is one of the plurality of MTT leaf nodes.
  18. 如权利要求11到15任一所述的方法,其特征在于:所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定划分深度N等于第二阈值T2减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第二阈值T2,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式或者四叉树 划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T2为大于1的正整数。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the partition depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, wherein Dq is a quadtree partition depth of the node, and Db is a majority of the node. Depth of type division. If the node is a MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the node. The Db of the root node is increased by 1. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the root node of the node. Db plus 1, if the node is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2 ; Determining that the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth N is equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1, and the division method is A first node of a tri-tree partitioning method, The area covered by the points is used as the MER of the first node, or it is determined that the division depth N is equal to the second threshold T2, and the division method is the first node of the binary tree division method or the quadtree division method, The area covered is the MER of the first node, where T2 is a positive integer greater than 1.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于:所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括进一步包括:确定划分深度N小于或者等于第二阈值T2减1且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。The method according to claim 18, wherein the determining the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and including the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node further comprises: determining the division The depth N is less than or equal to the second threshold T2 minus 1 and is the first node of the leaf node, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
  20. 如权利要求11到15任一所述的方法,其特征在于:所述划分深度N=Dq*2+Db,其中,Dq为所述节点的四叉树划分深度,Db为所述节点的多类型划分深度,若所述节点为MTT根节点,所述节点的Db等于0,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点由二叉树划分方式得到时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中位于中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加1,若所述节点为MTT的叶节点,且所述节点为由三叉树划分方式得到的三个节点中非中间的节点时,所述节点的Db为该节点根节点的Db加2;所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括:确定划分深度N等于第三阈值T3减1,且划分方式为三叉树划分方式或者四叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,或者确定划分深度N等于所述第三阈值T3,且划分方式为二叉树划分方式的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER,其中所述T3为大于1的正整数。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the partition depth N = Dq * 2 + Db, wherein Dq is a quadtree partition depth of the node, and Db is a majority of the node. Depth of type division. If the node is a MTT root node, the Db of the node is equal to 0. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is obtained by binary tree division, the Db of the node is the node. The Db of the root node is increased by 1. If the node is a leaf node of the MTT and the node is a middle node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the root node of the node. Db plus 1, if the node is a leaf node of the MTT, and the node is a non-intermediate node among the three nodes obtained by the tri-tree division method, the Db of the node is the Db of the root node of the node plus 2 ; Determining that the first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node includes: determining that the division depth N is equal to the third threshold T3 minus 1, and the division method is The first of the three-tree division or the four-tree division Node, using the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node, or determining the first node whose partition depth N is equal to the third threshold T3 and the partition method is a binary tree partition method, The covered area is taken as the MER of the first node, where T3 is a positive integer greater than 1.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于:所述确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER包括进一步包括:确定划分深度N小于或者等于第三阈值T3且为所述叶子节点的第一节点,将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的MER。The method according to claim 20, wherein the determining a first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and including the area covered by the first node as the MER of the first node further comprises: determining the division The depth N is less than or equal to the third threshold T3 and is the first node of the leaf node, and the area covered by the first node is used as the MER of the first node.
  22. 如权利要求11至21任意一项所述的方法,所述基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 21, wherein the constructing an airspace motion information candidate list based on the second coding block comprises:
    基于所述第二编码块的运动信息构建所述空域运动信息候选列表。Constructing the airspace motion information candidate list based on the motion information of the second coding block.
  23. 一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码装置,其包括:A decoding device based on a motion estimation evaluation region (Motion, Estimate, Region, MER), which includes:
    解析模块,用于获取当前编码块的划分信息;A parsing module, configured to obtain division information of a current coding block;
    MER确定模块,用于根据所述划分信息确定所述当前编码块所属的当前MER;A MER determination module, configured to determine a current MER to which the current coding block belongs according to the division information;
    空域运动信息候选列表构建模块,用于确定第一编码块,所述第一编码块为所述当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;The spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module is configured to determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block; determining the current coding block and the first coding block Whether it belongs to the same MER; and in a case where the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER, based on the position relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and information of the current MER, Determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace, wherein the MER information includes coordinates of the MER; and constructing a spatial domain motion information candidate list based on the second coding block, the second coding block being located at Other than the current MER;
    重建模块,用于根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。A reconstruction module is configured to predict and reconstruct the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating the coordinates of the current coding block, and determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information In aspect, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to:
    在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;When xN-xP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and M is an integer, And M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER;
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER. Coordinates, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  25. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating the coordinates of the current coding block, and determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information In aspect, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to:
    在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;In a case where xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER M, an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER;
    在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。When yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and N is an integer And N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  26. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the MER, and the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. , In terms of determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace motion information The candidate list building block is used to:
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper right corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1);
    其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。Among them, (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, hMER indicates the height of the MER, and wMER indicates the width of the MER.
  27. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates coordinates of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) indicates The aspect of determining the coordinates of the current MER based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the information of the current MER, determining an aspect of a second encoding block adjacent to the current MER space. The airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to:
    在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);When xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yN);
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xN, yMER-1);
    在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。When both xN-xP and yN-yP are integers smaller than zero, the coordinate range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is greater than An integer equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
  28. 一种基于运动估计评估区域(Motion Estimation Region MER)的解码装置,其包括:A decoding device based on a motion estimation evaluation region (Motion, Estimate, Region, MER), which includes:
    解析模块,用于获取编码树单元的划分信息;A parsing module for obtaining division information of a coding tree unit;
    划分模块,用于根据所述划分信息对所述编码树单元划分得到多个节点,所述多个节点中被继续划分的节点为父节点,未被进一步划分的节点为叶节点;A division module, configured to divide the coding tree unit to obtain multiple nodes according to the division information, among the multiple nodes, a node that is continuously divided is a parent node, and a node that is not further divided is a leaf node;
    MER确定模块,用于确定划分深度满足预设条件的第一节点,并将所述第一节点所覆盖的区域作为第一节点的当前MER,所述第一节点可以为所述父节点或者叶节点;The MER determination module is configured to determine a first node whose division depth satisfies a preset condition, and use an area covered by the first node as the current MER of the first node. The first node may be the parent node or the leaf. node;
    空域运动信息候选列表构建模块,用于确定第一编码块,其中,所述第一编码块为当前编码块的一个空域候选对应的编码块,所述当前编码块为所述第一节点或者所述第一节点经过进一步划分得到的叶子节点;确定所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块是否属于同一MER;在所述当前编码块与所述第一编码块属于同一MER的情况下,基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块,其中,所述MER的信息包括所述MER的坐标;基于所述第二编码块构建空域运动信息候选列表,所述第二编码块位于所述当前MER之外;The spatial domain motion information candidate list construction module is configured to determine a first coding block, where the first coding block is a coding block corresponding to one spatial domain candidate of the current coding block, and the current coding block is the first node or all the coding blocks. The leaf node obtained by further dividing the first node; determining whether the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER; and in a case where the current encoding block and the first encoding block belong to the same MER, Determining a second coding block that is adjacent to the current MER airspace based on a positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and information of the current MER, wherein the MER information includes the MER Constructing a spatial motion information candidate list based on the second encoding block, the second encoding block being located outside the current MER;
    重建模块,用于根据所述空域运动信息候选列表对所述当前编码块进行预测及重建。A reconstruction module is configured to predict and reconstruct the current coding block according to the spatial domain motion information candidate list.
  29. 如权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating the coordinates of the current coding block, and determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information In aspect, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to:
    在xN-xP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述当前MER的高的两倍;When xN-xP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and M is an integer, And M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the current MER;
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER. Coordinates, N is an integer, and N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  30. 如权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述当前MER的宽和高,(xN,yN)指示所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the current MER, (xN, yN) indicates coordinates of the first coding block, (xP, yP) Indicating the coordinates of the current coding block, and determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER space based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information In aspect, the airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to:
    在xN-xP小于零且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+M),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,M为整数,且M大于等于1,M小于等于所述MER的高的两倍;In a case where xN-xP is less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, it is determined that the coordinate corresponding to the second coding block is (xMER-1, yMER + M), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the current MER M, an integer, and M is greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to twice the height of the MER;
    在yN-yP小于零的情况下,确定与所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+N,yMER-1),其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,N为整数,且N大于等于-1,N小于等于所述MER的宽的两倍。When yN-yP is less than zero, it is determined that the coordinates corresponding to the second coding block are (xMER + N, yMER-1), where (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the current MER, and N is an integer And N is greater than or equal to -1, and N is less than or equal to twice the width of the MER.
  31. 如权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述当前MER的信息还包括所述MER的宽和高,所述第一编码块是所述当前编码块的多个空域临近块中的一个,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块 的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the information of the current MER further comprises a width and a height of the MER, and the first coding block is one of a plurality of spatially adjacent blocks of the current coding block. , In terms of determining a second coding block adjacent to the current MER airspace based on the positional relationship between the first coding block and the current coding block, and the current MER information, the airspace motion information The candidate list building block is used to:
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左下角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the lower left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左侧边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER+hMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the left side of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER + hMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的右上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper right corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的上边相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER+wMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the top of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER + wMER-1, yMER-1);
    在所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的左上角相邻的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yMER-1);In a case where the first encoding block is adjacent to the upper left corner of the current encoding block, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yMER-1);
    其中,(xMER,yMER)指示所述MER的坐标,hMER指示所述MER的高,wMER指示所述MER的宽。Among them, (xMER, yMER) indicates the coordinates of the MER, hMER indicates the height of the MER, and wMER indicates the width of the MER.
  32. 如权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,(xN,yN)指示所述所述第一编码块的坐标,(xP,yP)指示所述当前编码块的坐标,(xMER,yMER)指示所述当前MER的坐标,在所述基于所述第一编码块与所述当前编码块的位置关系,以及所述当前MER的信息,确定与所述当前MER空域临近的第二编码块的方面,所述空域运动信息候选列表构建模块用于:The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein (xN, yN) indicates the coordinates of the first encoding block, (xP, yP) indicates the coordinates of the current encoding block, and (xMER, yMER) indicates The aspect of determining the coordinates of the current MER based on the positional relationship between the first encoding block and the current encoding block, and the information of the current MER, determining an aspect of a second encoding block adjacent to the current MER space. The airspace motion information candidate list construction module is configured to:
    在xN-xP为小于零的整数且yN-yP大于等于零的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xMER-1,yN);When xN-xP is an integer less than zero and yN-yP is greater than or equal to zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xMER-1, yN);
    在xN-xP大于等于零且yN-yP为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标为(xN,yMER-1);In a case where xN-xP is greater than or equal to zero and yN-yP is an integer less than zero, the coordinates corresponding to the second encoding block are (xN, yMER-1);
    在xN-xP和yN-yP均为小于零的整数的情况下,所述第二编码块对应的坐标取值范围为,x轴取大于等于xMER-1且小于xP的整数,y轴取大于等于yMER-1且小于yP的整数。When both xN-xP and yN-yP are integers smaller than zero, the coordinate range corresponding to the second coding block is: the x-axis is an integer greater than or equal to xMER-1 and less than xP, and the y-axis is greater than An integer equal to yMER-1 and less than yP.
  33. 一种视频解码器,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至10,或者权利要求11至22任一所述的方法的执行电路。A video decoder, comprising an execution circuit for performing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10 or 11 to 22.
  34. 一种视频解码器,其特征在于,包括:A video decoder, comprising:
    至少一个处理器;和At least one processor; and
    与所述至少一个处理器耦合的非易失性计算机可读存储介质,所述非易失性计算机可读存储介质存储有可被所述至少一个处理器执行的计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被所述至少一个处理器执行时,使得所述视频解码器用于执行如权利要求权利要求1至10,或者权利要求11至22任一所述的方法。A non-volatile computer-readable storage medium coupled to the at least one processor, the non-volatile computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program executable by the at least one processor, and when the computer program When executed by the at least one processor, the video decoder is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10 or 11 to 22.
    一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储可被处理器执行的计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被所述至少一个处理器执行时,执行如权利权利要求1至10,或者权利要求11至22任一所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program executable by a processor, and when the computer program is executed by the at least one processor, execution of claims 1 to 10 or claims 11 to 22 Any of the methods described.
    一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备中设置有如权利要求23至33任意一项所述的解码装置。An electronic device, wherein the electronic device is provided with the decoding device according to any one of claims 23 to 33.
PCT/CN2019/107931 2018-09-27 2019-09-25 Video decoding method and video decoder WO2020063687A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811134191.5 2018-09-27
CN201811134191.5A CN110958452B (en) 2018-09-27 2018-09-27 Video decoding method and video decoder

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020063687A1 true WO2020063687A1 (en) 2020-04-02

Family

ID=69952484

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/107931 WO2020063687A1 (en) 2018-09-27 2019-09-25 Video decoding method and video decoder

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110958452B (en)
WO (1) WO2020063687A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113891089A (en) * 2020-07-03 2022-01-04 杭州海康威视数字技术股份有限公司 Method, device and equipment for constructing motion information candidate list

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102447894A (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-05-09 华为技术有限公司 Video image coding method and device as well as video image decoding method and device
CN104349170A (en) * 2011-09-23 2015-02-11 株式会社Kt Method for decoding video signals
US20150055705A1 (en) * 2010-02-02 2015-02-26 Humax Holdings Co., Ltd. Image encoding/decoding apparatus and method
CN106034236A (en) * 2015-03-19 2016-10-19 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Method, Apparatus and coder for selecting optimal reference frame in HEVC
CN107071457A (en) * 2011-11-23 2017-08-18 数码士有限公司 Video encoding/decoding method
WO2017176092A1 (en) * 2016-04-08 2017-10-12 한국전자통신연구원 Method and device for inducing motion prediction information

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3781075B2 (en) * 1997-07-22 2006-05-31 Kddi株式会社 Image motion estimation region segmentation method and apparatus
US9143795B2 (en) * 2011-04-11 2015-09-22 Texas Instruments Incorporated Parallel motion estimation in video coding
US9544592B2 (en) * 2012-02-10 2017-01-10 Texas Instruments Incorporated Methods and systems for encoding pictures associated with video data
KR20180041831A (en) * 2016-10-17 2018-04-25 디지털인사이트 주식회사 Video coding method and apparatus using skip candidate list according to block partition
US20180242024A1 (en) * 2017-02-21 2018-08-23 Mediatek Inc. Methods and Apparatuses of Candidate Set Determination for Quad-tree Plus Binary-tree Splitting Blocks
KR20180098158A (en) * 2017-02-24 2018-09-03 주식회사 케이티 Method and apparatus for processing a video signal

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150055705A1 (en) * 2010-02-02 2015-02-26 Humax Holdings Co., Ltd. Image encoding/decoding apparatus and method
CN102447894A (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-05-09 华为技术有限公司 Video image coding method and device as well as video image decoding method and device
CN104349170A (en) * 2011-09-23 2015-02-11 株式会社Kt Method for decoding video signals
CN107071457A (en) * 2011-11-23 2017-08-18 数码士有限公司 Video encoding/decoding method
CN106034236A (en) * 2015-03-19 2016-10-19 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Method, Apparatus and coder for selecting optimal reference frame in HEVC
WO2017176092A1 (en) * 2016-04-08 2017-10-12 한국전자통신연구원 Method and device for inducing motion prediction information

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113891089A (en) * 2020-07-03 2022-01-04 杭州海康威视数字技术股份有限公司 Method, device and equipment for constructing motion information candidate list
CN113891089B (en) * 2020-07-03 2022-12-23 杭州海康威视数字技术股份有限公司 Method, device and equipment for constructing motion information candidate list

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110958452B (en) 2023-11-03
CN110958452A (en) 2020-04-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111107356B (en) Image prediction method and device
CN112040229B (en) Video decoding method, video decoder, and computer-readable storage medium
WO2020088324A1 (en) Video image prediction method and apparatus
CN110891180B (en) Video decoding method and video decoder
CN110868589A (en) Inter-frame prediction method and device and encoding/decoding method and device applied by same
CN110855998B (en) Fusion candidate list construction method and device, and fusion candidate list editing/decoding method and device
US20230370597A1 (en) Picture partitioning method and apparatus
CN110944184B (en) Video decoding method and video decoder
WO2020063687A1 (en) Video decoding method and video decoder
WO2020181476A1 (en) Video image prediction method and device
CN111010565A (en) Inter-frame prediction method and device and encoding/decoding method and device applied by same
WO2020048361A1 (en) Video decoding method and video decoder
WO2020038357A1 (en) Fusion candidate list construction method, device and encoding/decoding method and device
WO2020042990A1 (en) Inter-frame prediction method and device, and coding/decoding method and device for application thereof
WO2020043136A1 (en) Picture partition method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19864234

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19864234

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1